Toyota 2020 Avalon Owner's Manual

Correct use of the seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (

 P. 30)

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

( 

P. 56)

Adjusting the mirrors

Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. ( 

P. 155, 157)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.

● Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.

● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.

Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.

1-1. For safe use

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts

● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

● Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

● Do not twist the seat belt.

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.

To release the seat belt, press the release button.

Release button

1-1. For safe use

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)

Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button.

Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up.

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

Release button

Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats)

The pretensioners help the seat belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision or a vehicle rollover.

The pretensioners do not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact or a rear impact.

1-1. For safe use

■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. ( 

P. 60)

■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (

● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. ( 

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

■ Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.

■ Rear seat belt

Use the seat belt after passing it through the guide if the seat belt comes free from the guide.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■ Wearing a seat belt

● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

● Always wear a seat belt properly.

● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.

● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. ( 

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (

 P. 30)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■ Seat belt pretensioners

● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.

■ Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (

 P. 31)

■ Seat belt damage and wear

● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.

● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.

Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.

● Always make sure the shoulder belt passes through the guide when using the seat belt. Failure to properly position the belt may reduce the amount of protection in an accident and could lead to death or serious injury in a collision or sudden stop.

● Always make sure that the seat belt is not twisted, does not get caught in the guide or the seatback and is arranged in the proper position.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ Using a seat belt extender

● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

NOTICE

■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

◆ SRS front airbags

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components

SRS knee airbags

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection

1-1. For safe use

◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags

SRS front side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

SRS rear side airbags

Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats

SRS curtain shield airbags

● Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats

● Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbag system components

Front impact sensors

Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)

Knee airbags

Side impact sensors (front doors)

Side impact sensors (front)

Front passenger airbag

Front side airbags

Curtain shield airbags

Rear side airbags

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Airbag sensor assembly

Side impact sensors (rear)

Driver airbag

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters

Driver’s seat position sensor

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, nonslippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver’s seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver’s seat belt, the SRS front airbags for the driver will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags for the driver may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

1-1. For safe use

● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

● Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.

● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seats toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel.

These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

● Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield, the windows, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.

● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.

● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the SRS airbags.

Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components or the front doors.

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars, roof side rails, front door panels, front door trims or front door speakers

● Modifications to the front door panel (such as making a hole in it)

● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment

● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches, or roof luggage carrier

● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system

● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players

● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

1-1. For safe use

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

● The windshield may crack.

● The interior lights will turn on automatically. (

 P. 332)

● The emergency flashers will turn on automatically. (

 P. 422)

● For Safety Connect subscribers, if any of the following situations occur, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (

 P. 71)

• An SRS airbag is deployed.

• A seat belt pretensioner is activated.

• The vehicle is involved in a severe rear-end collision.

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)

● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 -

18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact

• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck

● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.

● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.

1-1. For safe use

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).

● Both SRS curtain shield airbags may deploy in the event of a severe side collision.

● Both SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.

● Both SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.

■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle.

Some examples are shown in the illustration.

● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

● Landing hard or falling

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration.

● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.

● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

1-1. For safe use

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

● Collision from the side

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

● Collision from the front

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

1-1. For safe use

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.

● Collision from the rear

● Pitching end over end

■ When to contact your Toyota dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

● A portion of a door or its surrounding area is damaged, deformed or has had a hole made in it, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the SRS side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

1-1. For safe use

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the SRS curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

1-1. For safe use

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag.

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

SRS warning light

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

1-1. For safe use

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

■ Adult * 1

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

Front passenger knee airbag

“AIR BAG ON”

Off

* 2

or flashing

* 3

Activated

■ Child * 4

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

SRS warning light

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

Front passenger knee airbag

■ Child restraint system with infant * 5

“AIR BAG

OFF” or

“AIR BAG ON”

* 4

Off

* 2

or flashing

* 3

Deactivated or activated

* 4

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

Front passenger knee airbag

“AIR BAG

OFF”

* 6

Off

* 2

or flashing

* 3

Deactivated

1-1. For safe use

■ Unoccupied

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

Front passenger knee airbag

■ There is a malfunction in the system

“AIR BAG

OFF”

Off

Deactivated

Indicator/ warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

“AIR BAG OFF”

Front passenger airbag

Devices Deactivated

Front passenger knee airbag

* 1

: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.

* 2

: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.

* 3

: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

* 4

: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture.

* 5

: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (

* 6

: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. ( 

P. 60)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Wear the seat belt properly.

● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.

● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.

seatback pocket).

● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.

● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (

 P. 60)

● Do not modify or remove the front seats.

● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact your

Toyota dealer immediately.

● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.

● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.

● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

● Do not place anything between the console box and front passenger seat.

Otherwise, the system may not detect the front passenger properly, leading to improper operation of the airbags.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so that the head restraint does not touch the ceiling. If the head restraint is left in contact with the ceiling, the system may not detect the front passenger properly, leading to improper operation of the airbags.

1-1. For safe use

Safety information for children

Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.

● Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally.

● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc.

WARNING

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.

There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

1-1. For safe use

Child restraint systems

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the LATCH anchors or the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.

● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.

● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual.

( 

P. 60)

1-1. For safe use

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child:

 Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat

 Forward facing  Convertible seat

 Booster seat

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (

 P. 30)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ Child restraint precautions

● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.

● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.

In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.

Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■ When the child restraint system is not in use

● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.

● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions.

Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.

Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the outboard rear seats. (Marks displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)

Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism

(ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) ( 

P. 32)

Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

An anchor bracket is provided for each rear seat.

1-1. For safe use

Installation with LATCH system

■ When installing in the rear outboard seats

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.

( 

P. 151)

Remove the cover.

 With flexible lower attachments

Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

1-1. For safe use



With rigid lower attachments

Latch the buckles onto the

LATCH anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

■

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. ( 

P. 67)

After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (

 P. 69)

When installing in the rear center seat

There are no LATCH anchors behind the rear center seat. However, the inboard LATCH anchors of the outboard seats, which are

16.9 in. (430 mm) apart, can be used if the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions permit use of those anchors with the anchor spacing stated.

Child restraint systems with rigid lower attachments cannot be installed in the center seat. This type of child restraint system can only be installed in the outboard seat.

1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

■ Rear-facing  Infant seat/convertible seat

Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

1-1. For safe use

While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

■

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

Forward-facing  Convertible seat

If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.

( 

P. 151)

Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

1-1. For safe use

Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (

 P. 67)

1-1. For safe use

■ Booster seat

Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. ( 

Warning lights and indicators .......................... 84

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

1-1. For safe use

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

Adjust the head restraint to the upmost position.

If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint. ( 

P. 151)

Secure the child restraint system using the seat belt or

LATCH anchors.

Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

Top tether strap

Hook

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. ( 

P. 32)

■ When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

● Only put a forward-facing child restraint system on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■ When installing a child restraint system

● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed.

● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

● When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerve or an accident.

1-1. For safe use

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.

WARNING

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■ Important points while driving

● Keep the trunk lid closed.

● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ When parking

● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the engine.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine on for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

■ Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

1-2. Emergency assistance

Safety Connect



Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Toyota’s designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.

Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.

By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Toyota.com in the

United States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto Rico and Toyota.ca in

Canada. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.

■ System components

Microphone

LED light indicators

“SOS” button



: If equipped

1-2. Emergency assistance

■ Services

Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:

● Automatic Collision Notification *

Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. ( 

P. 74)

: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2

● Stolen Vehicle Location

Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (

 P. 74)

● Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)

Connects drivers to response-center support. (

 P. 74)

● Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Provides drivers various on-road assistance. ( 

P. 75)

■ Subscription

After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.

A variety of subscription terms are available for purchase. Contact your Toyota dealer, call the following appropriate Safety Connect response center or push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details.

• The United States

1-855-405-6500

• Canada

1-888-869-6828

• Puerto Rico

1-877-855-8377

1-2. Emergency assistance

■ Safety Connect Services Information

● Phone calls using the vehicle’s Bluetooth ® during Safety Connect.

technology will not be possible

● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Toyota models (in the contiguous United States only). Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service

Agreement are required. A variety of subscription terms are available; charges vary by subscription term selected and location.

● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle

Location are available in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska,

Puerto Rico and Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance are available in the United States, Puerto Rico and Canada.

● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle and

Enhanced Road Assistance are not available in the U.S. Virgin Islands.

For vehicles first sold in the U.S. Virgin Islands, no Safety Connect services will function in or outside the U.S. Virgin Islands.

● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.

■ Languages

The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages.

The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English, Spanish, and

French. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.

■ When contacting the response center

You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.

Safety Connect LED light Indicators

When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.

The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:

● Green indicator light on = Active service

● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process

● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction

(contact your Toyota dealer)

● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active

1-2. Emergency assistance

Safety Connect services

■ Automatic Collision Notification

In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency.

If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location.

■ Stolen Vehicle Location

If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-855-

405-6500 in the United States, 1-877-855-8377 in Puerto Rico or 1-

888-869-6828 in Canada, and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.

In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Toyota.com in the United

States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada.

■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)

In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.

If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency.

1-2. Emergency assistance

■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Toyota roadside service.

Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the

Enhanced Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Toyota.com in the United States, Toyotapr.com in

Puerto Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada.

Safety information for Safety Connect

Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.

■ Exposure to radio frequency signals

The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.

In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.

● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]

● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]

● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation

Protection) [1996]

Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).

The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.

1-2. Emergency assistance

■ Certification for Safety Connect

FCC ID: LHJ-TVN

IC: 2807E-TVN

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system

The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

The indicator light flashes after the engine switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing after the engine switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or IGNI-

TION ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.

■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object

● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system

(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

1-3. Theft deterrent system

■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

1-3. Theft deterrent system

WARNING

■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE

■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Alarm

The alarm

The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected.

The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:

● A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key. (The doors will lock again automatically.)

● The trunk is opened in any way other than using the entry function or wireless remote control.

● The hood is opened.

Setting the alarm system

Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all the doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.

The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.

Deactivating or stopping the alarm

Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm:

● Unlock the doors.

● Open the trunk using the entry function or wireless remote control.

● Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

1-3. Theft deterrent system

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.

■ Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:

● Nobody is in the vehicle.

● The windows and moon roof (if equipped) are closed before the alarm is set.

● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

■ Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:

(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)

● The trunk is opened using the mechanical key.

● A person inside the vehicle opens a door or the trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle.

● The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. ( 

P. 464)

1-3. Theft deterrent system

■ Alarm-operated door lock

In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically lock to prevent improper entry into the vehicle:

● When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is activated.

● While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.

● When recharging or replacing the battery

NOTICE

■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters ............ 90

Multi-information display ..... 93

Head-up display ................ 109

Fuel consumption information ...................... 116

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster, center panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning lights and indicators illuminated.

The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on the target region.

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems.

Brake system warning light ( 

P. 430)

(U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light ( 

P. 430)

(Canada)

(Red)

Brake system warning light ( 

P. 430)

(Yellow)

High coolant temperature warning light

(

 P. 430)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

(U.S.A.)

Charging system warning light (

 P. 430)

(Canada)

1, 3

Low engine oil pressure warning light (

 P. 430)

ABS warning light

( 

P. 431)

ABS warning light

( 

P. 431)

Brake Override System/

Drive-Start Control/Intelligent Clearance Sonar

(if equipped) warning light ( 

P. 431)

Parking brake indicator

( 

Parking brake indicator

( 

Brake hold operated indicator ( 

Malfunction indicator lamp (

(U.S.A.)

Malfunction indicator lamp (

(Canada)

SRS warning light

(

Electric power steering system warning light

( 

(Red/yellow)

1, 4

PCS warning light

( 

1, 3

(if equipped)

ICS OFF indicator

( 

2. Instrument cluster

LDA indicator (

 P. 432)

(Amber)

Slip indicator ( 

Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights

( 

Master warning light

( 

Low fuel level warning light ( 

Tire pressure warning light ( 

P. 434)

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light ( 

* 1

: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

* 2

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

* 3

: This light flashes to indicate a malfunction.

* 4

: This light flashes or illuminates to indicate a malfunction.

* 5

: This light illuminates on the center panel.

2. Instrument cluster

Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator

(

 P. 195)

Brake hold standby indicator ( 

P. 200)

Headlight indicator

(

 P. 202)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Tail light indicator

(

 P. 202)

Headlight high beam indicator (

 P. 203)

Cruise control indicator

( 

P. 248)

Dynamic radar cruise control indicator

( 

P. 248)

* 2

Cruise control “SET” indicator ( 

P. 248)

Automatic High Beam indicator (

 P. 206)

1, 4

PCS warning light

( 

P. 230)

1, 2, 3

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

1, 4

Eco driving indicator

(

 P. 107)

Parking brake indicator

(

 P. 196)

(if equipped)

* 2

(White)

Parking brake indicator

(

 P. 196)

(Green)

2, 5

Brake hold operated indicator (

 P. 200)

(Amber)

ICS OFF indicator

( 

LDA indicator (

LDA indicator (

LDA indicator (

2. Instrument cluster

1, 5

Slip indicator ( 

P. 310)

Smart key system indicator (

 P. 184)

* 1, 4

VSC OFF indicator

(

 P. 312)

“SPORT” indicator

( 

“BSM” indicator

(

(if equipped)

“RCTA” indicator

(

6, 7 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) outside rear view mirror indicators

(

(if equipped)

1, 8 “AIR BAG

ON/OFF” indicator

( 

P. 50)

2, 9

Security indicator

(

 P. 77, 80)

“SPORT S” indicator

( 

“SPORT S+” indicator

( 

“CUSTOM” indicator

( 

“ECO MODE” indicator

( 

Low outside temperature indicator (

 P. 90)

Intuitive parking assist indicator (

 P. 276)

(if equipped)

2. Instrument cluster

* 1

* 2

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

* 3

: This light does not turn on when the system is disabled.

* 4

: This light turns on when the system is off.

* 5

: This light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

* 6

: These indicators will illuminate in the following situations to indicate that the system initial check is being performed:

• When the BSM function or RCTA function is enabled and the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

• When the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the BSM function is enabled.

• When the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the RCTA function is enabled. (At this time, a buzzer will also sound.)

The indicators will turn off after a few seconds. If the indicators do not illuminate or turn off, or if a buzzer does not sound when the RCTA function is enabled, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

* 7

: This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.

* 8

: This light illuminates on the center panel.

* 9

: When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, this indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.

WARNING

■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning lights not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

The units used on the meters may differ depending on the target region.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

Shift position (

Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to

122°F (50°C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 37°F (3°C) or lower.

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data ( 

P. 93)

Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction ( 

Speedometer

Fuel gauge

Odometer and trip meter 

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

The brightness of some of the interior lights will be changed when the brightness of the instrument panel lights is adjusted. (

 P. 332)

Darker

Brighter

• The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted individually for day mode and night mode

• If the brightness is adjusted when the surroundings are bright and the tail lights are on

(day mode brightness adjustment), the brightness level of night mode will be adjusted at the same time.

: Day mode and night mode: 

P. 92

2. Instrument cluster

■ The meters and display illuminate when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ Brightness of the meters (day mode and night mode)

● The brightness of the meters is changed between day mode and night mode.

• Day mode: When the tail lights are off or when the tail lights are on but the surrounding area is bright

• Night mode: When the tail lights are on and the surrounding area is dark

● When in night mode, the brightness will be reduced slightly unless the meters are set to the maximum brightness level.

■ Outside temperature display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change:

● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 16 mph [25 km/h])

● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

● When “  ” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning.

Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components

● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.

● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (

 P. 466)

2. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display

Summary of functions

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data, such as the current outside temperature. The multiinformation display can also be used to change the display settings and other settings.

Indicators (

 P. 84)

Driving assist system status display area

Displays the operational status of the following systems:

• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (

 P. 248)

• LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) ( 

P. 238)

Speed limit display (vehicles with a navigation system) (U.S.A.

only)

Clock

For clock settings, refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Speedometer

The speedometer display can be enabled/disabled in on the multiinformation display. (

When is selected, the speedometer may be displayed in the content display area.

2. Instrument cluster

Content display area

A variety of information can be displayed by selecting a menu icon. Additionally, warning or suggestion/advice pop-up displays will be displayed in some situations.

• Menu icon content ( 

P. 96)

• Suggestion function ( 

• Warning message ( 

Odometer/trip meter ( 

Shift position (

Outside temperature ( 

P. 90)

Menu icons ( 

P. 96)

“ODO/TRIP” switch ( 

P. 95)

Meter control switches ( 

P. 94)

Using the multi-information display

◆ Using the content display area

The content display area is operated using the meter control switches.

Scroll screens * , change the displayed content * and move the cursor

Press: Enter/Set

Press and hold: Reset/Display the next screen

Return to the previous screen

Pressing and holding the switch will display the first screen of the selected menu icon.

Call sending/receiving display

Linked with the hands-free system, sending or receiving call is displayed. For details regarding the hands-free system, refer to the “NAVI-

GATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

: When the screen can be scrolled or different content can be displayed, a mark, such as an arrow, will be displayed to suggest which switch to operate.

2. Instrument cluster

◆ Using the odometer/trip meter

Items in this area are operated using the “ODO/TRIP” switch.

Press: Change displayed item

Each time the switch is pressed, the displayed item will be changed.

Press and hold: Reset

Display the desired trip meter and press and hold the switch to reset the trip meter.

2. Instrument cluster

Menu icons

Select a menu icon to display its content.

Driving information (

 P. 97)

Select to display the following:

• Speedometer/driving range

• Fuel consumption

• Eco Driving Indicator/driving range

Driving assist system information

Select to perform the following:

Display the operational status of the following systems:

• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (

 P. 248)

• LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) ( 

P. 238)

Display the following navigation system-linked information (if equipped):

• Route guidance

• Compass display (heading-up display)

Audio system-linked display

Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the multi-information display using the meter control switches.

Vehicle information

Select to perform the following:

Display the following information:

• Tire inflation pressure (

 P. 394)

Enable/Disable the following systems:

• Parking assist (Intuitive parking assist) (if equipped) ( 

P. 276)

• BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) function (

• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function ( 

P. 261)

These functions can also be enabled/disabled on .

Settings display (

Select to change the meter display settings and other settings.

Warning message display ( 

Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is detected.

2. Instrument cluster

Driving information ( )

■ Speedometer/driving range

• Speedometer

• Driving range

Displays the driving range with remaining fuel.

■

When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.

When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

Fuel consumption

Current fuel consumption

Displays the instantaneous current fuel consumption.

Average fuel economy (after start)

Displays the average fuel consumption since engine start.

* 1

Driving range

Displays the driving range with remaining fuel.

* 2, 3

2. Instrument cluster

Gadget * 4

The following items can be displayed by changing the settings for gadget content and fuel economy type on . ( 

Displayable item

Gadget content

Average vehicle speed

Fuel economy

Trip

(after start)

Total type

(after reset)

Distance

Trip

(after start)

Total

(after reset)

Content

Displays the average vehicle speed since engine start.

Displays the average vehicle speed since the display was reset.

* 5

Displays the distance driven since vehicle start.

Displays the distance driven since the display was reset.

* 5

Trip

(after start)

Displays the elapsed time since engine start.

Elapsed time

Total

(after reset)

Displays the elapsed time since the display was reset.

* 5

Average fuel economy

Displayed item (listed below) can be changed on the fuel economy type screen of . (

● Total (after reset)

Displays the average fuel consumption since the display was reset.

* 1, 5

● Tank (after refuel)

Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was refueled.

* 1, 2

2. Instrument cluster

* 1

: Use the displayed fuel consumption as a reference only.

* 2

: When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.

When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.

* 3

: This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

* 4

: The default setting is no display.

* 5

: This display can be reset by pressing and holding played.

while it is dis-

■ Eco Driving Indicator/driving range

• Eco Driving Indicator

 P. 107

• Driving range

Displays the driving range with remaining fuel.

When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.

When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

100

2. Instrument cluster

Settings display ( )

◆ Changing settings

Use the meter control switches on the steering wheel to change settings.

Press or to select .

Operate the switches to select a desired item.

Press or press and hold .

The available settings will differ depending on if pressed and held. Follow the instructions on the display.

is pressed or

◆ Setting items

■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) ( 

P. 238)

Press and hold to change the settings of the following items:

Item

Steering assist

Off

Settings Details

Select to enable/disable steering wheel assistance.

Alert sensitivity

(High)

(Normal)

Select to set the warning sensitivity.

Sway warning

Off

Select to enable/disable the vehicle sway warning.

Sway sensitivity

(High)

(Medium)

(Low)

Select to set the vehicle sway warning sensitivity.

2. Instrument cluster

101

■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (

 P. 226)

Press to enable/disable the pre-collision system.

Item Settings

PCS

Off

Details

Select to enable/disable the precollision system.

Press and hold to change the settings of the following item:

Item

Warning sensitivity

(Warning timing)

Settings

(Far)

(Middle)

(Near)

Details

Select to change the warning timing.

■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (

 P. 261)

Press to enable/disable the Blind Spot Monitor function.

Item Settings

BSM

Off

Details

Select to enable/disable the

Blind Spot Monitor function.

Press and hold

Item

Outside rear view mirror indicator brightness

to change the settings of the following item:

Settings

(Bright)

(Dim)

Details

Select to change the brightness of the outside rear view mirror indicators.

102

2. Instrument cluster

■ RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ( 

P. 261)

Press to enable/disable the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.

RCTA

Item

Off

Settings Details

Select to enable/disable the Rear

Cross Traffic Alert function.

Press and hold

Item

RCTA buzzer volume

to change the settings of the following item:

Settings

(Low)

(Medium)

(Loud)

Details

Select to change the volume of the RCTA buzzer.

■ ICS (Intelligent Clearance Sonar) (if equipped) ( 

P. 284)

Press to enable/disable the Intelligent Clearance Sonar.

Item Settings

ICS

Off

Details

Select to enable/disable the

Intelligent Clearance Sonar system.

■ Parking assist (Intuitive parking assist) (if equipped)

( 

P. 276)

Press to enable/disable the Intuitive parking assist.

Item

Intuitive parking assist

Off

Press and hold

Settings Details

Select to enable/disable the intuitive parking assist.

to change the settings of the following item:

Item Details

Volume

Settings

(Low)

(Medium)

(Loud)

Select to change the volume of the intuitive parking assist buzzer.

2. Instrument cluster

■ HUD (Head-up display) (if equipped) (

 P. 109)

Press to enable/disable the head-up display.

103

HUD

Item

Off

Settings Details

Select to enable/disable the head-up display.

Press and hold

Item

HUD Brightness/Position

HUD Driving support

to change the settings of the following items:

Settings

Tachometer settings

Navigation system

Driving Assist

Compass

Details

Select to adjust the brightness/ position of the head-up display.

• Press the / switch to adjust the display brightness.

• Press the / switch to adjust the display position.

Select to change the display between the following:

• Eco Driving Indicator

• Tachometer

• No content

Select to enable/disable head-up display content.

Rotation

Select to adjust the angle of the head-up display.

Press the / switch to adjust the display angle.

104

2. Instrument cluster

■ Vehicle settings

Press and hold to change the settings of the following items:

Item Settings Details

TPWS (Tire pressure warning system) ( 

P. 394)

Set pressure (tire pressure warning system initialization)

Change wheel (register tire pressure warning system sensor ID codes)

Select to initialize the tire pressure warning system. To perform initialization, press and hold the switch.

Before performing initialization, make sure to adjust the inflation pressure of each tire to the specified level. (

 P. 395)

Select to register the ID codes of the tire pressure sensors to the tire pressure warning system. To register the ID codes, press and hold the

( 

P. 396)

switch.

Scheduled maintenance display

Maintenance data reset

Select to reset the message indicating maintenance is required, after the required maintenance is performed. ( 

P. 373)

2. Instrument cluster

105

■ Meter settings

Press and hold to change the settings of the following items:

Units

Item

Language

Settings Details

Select to change the language displayed.

Select to change the units of measure displayed.

(Eco Driving

Indicator Light)

Speedometer

Gadget content

Fuel economy type

Off

Average vehicle speed

Distance

Elapsed time

Trip (after start)

* 1

Total (after reset)

Tank

(after refuel)

* 2

Select to enable/disable the Eco

Driving Indicator Light. (

 P. 107)

Select to enable/disable the speedometer display.

No display

Select to turn the display of a gadget.

Select to change the average fuel consumption display and an item to be displayed as gadget.

Multi-information display off

Select to turn the multi-information display off.

To turn the multi-information display on again, press any direction switch ( / / / ).

Pop-up display

Intersection guidance (if equipped)

Incoming calls

Brightness adjustment

Select to enable/disable the popup display.

Default setting

Select to reset the meter display settings to the default setting.

* 1

: Selecting this item will only change the gadget.

* 2

: Selecting this item will turn the display of the gadget off.

106

2. Instrument cluster

Odometer/trip meter

■ Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

■ Trip meter A/trip meter B

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

To reset, display the desired trip meter and press and hold the “ODO/

TRIP” switch.

Suggestion function

Displays suggestions to the driver in the following situations. To select a response to a displayed suggestion, use the meter control switches.

■

The suggestion function can be turned on/off.

(Customizable features: 

P. 497)

Suggestion to turn off the headlights

If the headlights are left on for a certain amount of time after the engine switch has been turned off, if the headlight switch is in the

“AUTO” position, a suggestion message will be displayed asking if you wish to turn the headlights off. To turn the headlights off, select

“Yes”.

If a front door is opened after the engine switch is turned off, this suggestion message will not be displayed.

2. Instrument cluster

107

■ Eco Driving Indicator

Eco Driving Indicator Light

During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco driving), the Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn on. When the acceleration exceeds the Zone of Eco driving, or when the vehicle is stopped, the light turns off.

Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display

Suggests the Zone of Eco driving with current Eco driving ratio based on acceleration.

Eco driving ratio based on acceleration

If the acceleration exceeds the Zone of

Eco driving, the right side of the Eco

Driving Indicator Zone Display will illuminate.

Zone of Eco driving

Eco Driving Indicator will not operate under the following conditions:

● The shift lever is in any position other than D.

● A paddle shift switch (if equipped) is operated.

● Neither normal mode nor Eco drive mode is selected. ( 

● The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher.

■ Suspension of the settings display

● Some settings cannot be changed while driving. When changing settings, park the vehicle in a safe place.

● If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will be suspended.

■ Tire pressure

● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.

● “---” may be displayed if the tire position information cannot be determined due to unfavorable radio wave conditions.

● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.

■ Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (

 P. 100, 497)

108

2. Instrument cluster

WARNING

■ Caution for use while driving

● When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra attention to the safety of the area around the vehicle.

● Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.

■ The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury.

■ Cautions during setting up the display

As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■ While setting up the display

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting up the display features.

2. Instrument cluster

109

Head-up display



Summary of functions

The head-up display is linked to the meters and navigation system and projects a variety of information in front of the driver, such as the current vehicle speed.

Driving assist system status/navigation system-linked display area

( 

P. 111)

The following pop-up displays will be displayed in certain situations:

• Pre-collision warning (pre-collision system)

• Alert from the Intelligent Clearance Sonar system (if equipped)

Shift position/speed limit display area

• Shift position (

Indicator). For details, refer to P.

• Speed limit (vehicles with a navigation system) (U.S.A. only)

Vehicle speed display

Eco Driving Indicator/Tachometer ( 

P. 112)

Information display area (

 P. 113)

The following pop-up displays will be displayed in certain situations:

• Warning/message

• Hands-free system status

• Audio system operation status



: If equipped

110

2. Instrument cluster

Using the head-up display

Select on the multi-information display (

 P. 100) and then

◆ Enabling/disabling the head-up display

Press to enable/disable the head-up display.

◆ Changing the head-up display settings

Press and hold to change the following settings:

■ Display brightness/position

■

Select to adjust the brightness and position of the head-up display.

Display content

■

Select to enable/disable the following items:

• Route guidance to destination

• Driving assist system status

• Compass

Select to change the display between the following:

• Eco Driving Indicator

• Tachometer

• No content

Display angle

Select to adjust the angle of the head-up display.

2. Instrument cluster

111

Driving assist system status/navigation system-linked display area

◆ Driving assist system status display

Displays the operational status of the following systems:

• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (

 P. 248)

• LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) (

 P. 238)

• Intuitive parking assist (if equipped) ( 

P. 276)

◆ Navigation system-linked display area

Displays the following items, which are linked to the navigation system:

■ Street name

When the navigation system is performing route guidance, the name of the next street will be displayed on the top of the display area.

■ Route guidance to destination

Displayed when the navigation system is performing route guidance. When approaching an intersection, an arrow will be displayed to indicate the suggested direction of travel.

■ Compass

Displays the direction of travel.

112

2. Instrument cluster

Eco Driving Indicator/Tachometer

■ Eco Driving Indicator

Eco Driving Indicator Zone

Display

Eco driving ratio based on acceleration

Zone of Eco driving

■

Displayed content is the same as that displayed on the multiinformation display (Eco Driving

107.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

2. Instrument cluster

113

Information display area

Displays the following items in the appropriate situation:

■ Warning/Message

● Alert from the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)

● Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

● message

Displayed when a suggestion/advice pop-up display is displayed on the multi-information display. ( 

● message

■

Displayed when a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display. ( 

Keys .................................. 122

● Outside temperature

Displayed in the following situations:

• When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode

• When the low outside temperature indicator is flashing

Displayed content is the same as that displayed on the multi-information display. For details, refer to the explanation of the outside temperature display on the multi-information display. ( 

P. 90)

Hands-free system status

■

Displayed when the hands-free system is operated.

Audio system operation status

Displayed when the audio system is operated.

114

2. Instrument cluster

■ Head-up display

The head-up display may seem dark or hard to see when viewed through sunglasses, especially polarized sunglasses.

Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses.

■ Display brightness

The brightness of the head-up display can be adjusted on of the multiinformation display. Also, it is automatically adjusted according to the ambient brightness.

■ Enabling/disabling of the head-up display

If the head-up display is disabled, it will remain disabled when the engine switch is turned off then back to IGNITION ON mode.

■ Street name display

Only street names which are included in the map data will be displayed.

WARNING

■ Before using the head-up display

● Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not interfere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image’s position or brightness may obstruct the driver’s view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not continuously look at the head-up display while driving as you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.

■ Caution for changing settings of the head-up display

As the engine needs to be running while changing the settings of the headup display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

2. Instrument cluster

115

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to components

● Do not place any drinks near the headup display projector. If the projector gets wet, electrical malfunctions may result.

● Do not place anything on or put stickers onto the head-up display projector.

Doing so could interrupt head-up display indications.

● Do not touch the inside of the head-up display projector or thrust sharp edges or the like into the projector.

Doing so could cause mechanical malfunctions.

■ When changing the settings of the head-up display

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while the changing the settings of the head-up display.

116

2. Instrument cluster

Fuel consumption information

Fuel consumption information can be displayed on the audio system screen.

Trip information

 Entune Audio Plus (vehicles without Data Communication Module)

Press the “MENU” button.

Select “Info” on the “Menu” screen.

If the “History” screen is displayed, select “Trip Information”.

2. Instrument cluster

117



Entune Audio Plus (vehicles with Data Communication Module) or

Entune Premium Audio

Press the “MENU” button.

Select “Info” on the “Menu” screen.

Select “ECO” on the “Information” screen.

If the “History” screen is displayed, select “Trip Information”.

Resetting the consumption data

Average vehicle speed since the engine was started

Elapsed time since the engine was started

Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes

Cruising range (

 P. 119)

Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past averages and averages attained since the engine switch was last turned to IGNITION ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

This image is an example only.

118

2. Instrument cluster

History

 Entune Audio Plus (vehicles without Data Communication Module)

Press the “MENU” button.

Select “Info” on the “Menu” screen.



If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “History”.

Entune Audio Plus (vehicles with Data Communication Module) or

Entune Premium Audio

Press the “MENU” button.

Select “Info” on the “Menu” screen.

Select “ECO” on the “Information” screen.

If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “History”.

Resetting the past record data

Best recorded fuel consumption

Current fuel economy

Previous fuel consumption record

 Entune Audio Plus

Displays the daily average fuel consumption. (Instead of the date,

“Trip 1” through “Trip 5” will be displayed.)

 Entune Premium Audio

Displays the daily average fuel consumption.

Updating the average fuel consumption data

The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated.

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

This image is an example only.

2. Instrument cluster

119

■ Updating the past record data

Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Clip” to measure the current fuel consumption again.

■ Resetting the data

The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.

■ Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.

As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

120

2. Instrument cluster

121

Operation of each component

3-1. Key information

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Doors ................................ 125

Trunk................................. 131

Smart key system ............. 135

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats ........................ 142

Rear seats......................... 144

Driving position memory........................... 146

Head restraints.................. 151

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel .................. 153

Inside rear view mirror ...... 155

Outside rear view mirrors............................. 157

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

Power windows ................. 160

Moon roof.......................... 164

122

Keys

3-1. Key information

The keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart key system

( 

P. 135)

• Operating the wireless remote control function (

 P. 122)

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

Wireless remote control

Locks all the doors (

Unlocks all the doors (

Opens the windows * 2 and moon roof * 1, 2

( 

P. 125)

Opens the trunk (

 P. 131)

Sounds the alarm (

 P. 123)

* 1

: If equipped

* 2

: This setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

Using the mechanical key

To take out the mechanical key, slide the release lever and take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side.

If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and reattempt to insert it.

After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (

3-1. Key information

123

■ Panic mode

When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.

■ If you lose your mechanical keys

New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using the other mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

■ When riding in an aircraft

When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any button on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

■ Conditions affecting operation



P. 137

■ Key battery depletion

● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.

● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine stops.

● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (

• The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.

• The detection area becomes smaller.

• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

● To reduce key battery depletion when the electronic key is to not be used for long periods of time, set the electronic key to the battery-saving mode.

(

 P. 137)

● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:

• TVs

• Personal computers

• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers

• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones

• Table lamps

• Induction cookers

124

3-1. Key information

■ Replacing the battery



P. 414

■ Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.

■ If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.

■ Certification for wireless remote control



P. 140

NOTICE

■ To prevent key damage

● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.

● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.

● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.

● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials.

● Do not disassemble the keys.

● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.

● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as

TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.

■ Carrying the electronic key on your person

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

■ In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related problems

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

■ When an electronic key is lost

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that were provided with your vehicle.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

125

Doors

Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside

◆

Smart key system

Carry the electronic key to enable this function.

Grip the driver’s door handle to unlock the door. Holding the driver’s door handle for approximately 2 seconds unlocks all the doors. Grip the front passenger’s door handle to unlock all the doors.

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

: The door unlock settings can be changed. ( 

P. 129)

Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the side of the door handle) to lock the doors.

Check that the door is securely locked.

◆ Wireless remote control

Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely locked.

Unlocks all the doors

Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

Press and hold to open the windows

* 2

and moon roof.

( 

P. 160, 165)

* 1

: If equipped

* 1, 2

* 2

: This setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

126

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Operation signals

Doors:

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

Windows and moon roof:

A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating.

■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the surface of the door handle

When the door cannot be locked even if the lock sensor on the surface of the door handle is touched by a finger, touch the lock sensor with the palm.

When gloves are being worn, remove the gloves.

■ Door lock buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

■ Setting the alarm

Locking the doors will set the alarm system. ( 

P. 80)

■ If the smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. ( 

P. 459)

Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (

For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 499.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside

◆ Door lock switches

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

127

◆

Inside lock buttons

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

Close the door.

The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.

The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

128

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

Unlock

Lock

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or cancelled:

Function

Speed linked door locking function

Shift position linked door locking function

Shift position linked door unlocking function

Driver’s door linked door unlocking function

Operation

All doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

All doors are automatically locked when shifting the shift lever out of P.

All doors are automatically unlocked when shifting the shift lever to P.

All doors are automatically unlocked when driver’s door is opened.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

129

■ Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.

Turn the engine switch off.

When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold ,

or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding .

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.

(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least

5 seconds, and repeat step

Multi-information display

Unlocking function Beep

Holding the driver’s door handle unlocks only the driver’s door.

Holding the front passenger’s door handle unlocks all the doors.

Holding either front door handle unlocks all the doors.

Exterior: Beeps 3 times

Interior: Pings once

Exterior: twice

Beeps

Interior: Pings once

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)

In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. ( 

P. 80)

■ Impact detection door lock release system

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate.

■ Open door warning buzzer

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), the master warning light flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the door(s) are not yet fully closed.

The open door(s) is displayed on the multi-information display.

130

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Using the mechanical key

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key.

( 

P. 459)

■ Conditions affecting the operation of the smart key system or wireless remote control



P. 137

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (

WARNING

■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.

● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.

● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

■ When opening or closing a door

Check the surroundings of the vehicle such as whether the vehicle is on an incline, whether there is enough space for a door to open and whether a strong wind is blowing.

When opening or closing the door, hold the door handle tightly to prepare for any unpredictable movement.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

131

Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener switch, entry function or wireless remote control.

Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle

Press the trunk opener switch.

Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle

◆ Smart key system

While carrying the electronic key, press the button on the trunk lid.

When all the doors are unlocked using one of the following methods, the trunk can be opened without the electronic key:

• Entry function

• Wireless remote control

• Door lock switches

• Automatic door unlocking system

• Mechanical key

◆ Wireless remote control

Press and hold the switch.

A buzzer sounds.

132

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Trunk light

The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.

■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside

● When all doors are locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm.

In this case, the trunk lid can be opened by pressing the trunk release button on the trunk lid.

● If the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key confinement prevention function is activated so the trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

● If the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key may not be detected depending on the location of the key and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed.

Make sure to check where the key is before closing the trunk.

● The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.

■ Open trunk warning buzzer

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), the master warning light flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk is not yet fully closed.

■ Internal trunk release lever

The trunk lid can be opened by pulling up the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid.

The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed.

■ Using the mechanical key

The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. ( 

P. 460)

■ If the smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Use the mechanical key to unlock the trunk. (

 P. 460)

Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

133

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Before driving

● Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk may be thrown out, causing an accident.

● Do not allow children to play in the trunk.

If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat exhaustion, suffocation or other injuries.

● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.

Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.

■ Important points while driving

Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

134

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

WARNING

■ Using the trunk

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.

● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close.

● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.

● On an incline it is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.

● When opening the trunk lid, take care so that it does not hit anyone in the face or any other part of the body.

● When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.

● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface.

● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

135

Smart key system

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.

The driver should always carry the electronic key.

● Locks and unlocks the doors ( 

P. 125)

● Opens the trunk (

 P. 131)

● Starts the engine (

 P. 184)

■ Antenna location

Antennas outside the cabin

Antennas inside the cabin

Antenna inside the trunk

Antenna outside the trunk

■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3

ft. (0.7 m) of either of the front outside door handles. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)

When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes

The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

When opening the trunk

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about

2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release button.

136

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display.

( 

When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows.

Alarm

Exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds

Interior alarm pings repeatedly

Situation

An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.

The trunk was closed while the electronic key was still inside the trunk and all the doors were locked.

The engine switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver’s door was open (The driver’s door was opened when the engine switch was in

ACCESSORY mode).

The engine switch was turned off while the driver’s door was open.

Correction procedure

Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.

Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid.

Turn the engine switch off and close the driver’s door.

Close the driver’s door.

■ Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time.

● In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to unlock the doors.

• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.

• The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.

● If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

137

■ Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function

When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.

Press twice while pressing and holding . Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart key system cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.

■ Conditions affecting operation

The smart key system, wireless remote control and engine immobilizer system use weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping:

● When the electronic key battery is depleted

● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached

• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside

• Metallic wallets or bags

• Coins

• Hand warmers made of metal

• Media such as CDs and DVDs

● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby

● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves

• Portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication devices

• Another vehicle’s electronic key, another electronic key of your vehicle, or a wireless key that emits radio waves

• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)

• Digital audio players

• Portable game systems

● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window

● When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices

● When the vehicle is parked in a pay parking spot where radio waves are emitted.

138

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Note for the entry function

● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.

• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is opened.

• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the engine is started or engine switch modes are changed.

● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.

● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.

● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.

● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash, when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.

● When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.

● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (

 P. 137)

● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

139

● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.

● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.

● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.

: This setting can be customized at your Toyota dealer.

■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.

● The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. ( 

P. 497)

● Setting the electronic key to battery-saving mode helps to reduce key battery depletion. ( 

P. 137)

■ To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)

■ If the smart key system does not operate properly

● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key. (

● Starting the engine:

 P. 460

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (

■ If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting

● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk:

Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (

 P. 125, 131, 459)

● Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes:

 P. 460

● Stopping the engine:

 P. 184

140

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Certification for the smart key system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

141

WARNING

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the smart key system antennas. (

 P. 135)

The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves.

Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.

● Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.

142

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats

Adjustment procedure

Seat position adjustment switch

Seatback angle adjustment switch

Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch

Vertical height adjustment switch

Lumbar support firmness adjustment switch (if equipped)

Lumbar support height adjustment switch (if equipped)

■ Power easy access system (vehicles with driving position memory)

The driver’s seat and steering wheel move in accordance with engine switch mode and the driver’s seat belt condition. (

 P. 146)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

143

WARNING

■ When adjusting the seat position

● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.

● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

● Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.

■ Seat adjustment

● Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.

● To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

NOTICE

■ When adjusting a front seat

When adjusting a front seat, make sure that the head restraint does not contact the headliner. Otherwise, the head restraint and headliner may be damaged.

144

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Rear seats

The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down.

Folding down the rear seatbacks

Pull the seatback lever in the trunk for the seatback you wish to fold down and then fold the seatback down.

3-3. Adjusting the seats

145

WARNING

■ When folding the seatbacks down

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.

● Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.

● Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driving.

● Do not allow children to enter the trunk.

■ When returning the seat to its original position

● Ensure that the seat belt does not get caught between or behind the seats.

● If the seat belt has been released from its guide, pass the seat belt through its guide. ( 

P. 32)

■ Seat adjustment

Be careful not to get hands or feet pinched between the rear console box and the rear seat when folding down the rear seatback.

■ After returning the seatback to the upright position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pressing it forward and rearward on the top.

● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

● Make sure that the seat belt is passed through its guide.

NOTICE

■ When the right seatback is folded down

Make sure the luggage loaded in the enlarged trunk will not damage the webbing of the rear center seat belt.

146

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Driving position memory



This feature automatically adjusts the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors to make entering and exiting the vehicle easier or to suit your preferences.

Power easy access system

The seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to allow the driver to enter and exit the vehicle easily.

When all of the following have been performed, the driver’s seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to a position that allows driver to enter and exit the vehicle easily.

• The shift lever has been shifted to P.

• The engine switch has been turned off.

• The driver’s seat belt has been unfastened.

When any of the following has been performed, the driver’s seat and steering wheel automatically return to their original positions.

• The engine switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode or IGNI-

TION ON mode.

• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.

■ Operation of the power easy access system

When exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system may not operate if the seat is already close to the rearmost position, etc.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (



: If equipped

3-3. Adjusting the seats

147

Driving position memory

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be recorded and recalled by pressing a button.

Two different driving positions can be recorded into memory.

■ Recording procedure

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions.

While pressing the “SET” button, or within 3 seconds after the “SET” button is pressed, press button “1” or

“2” until the buzzer sounds.

■

If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.

Recall procedure

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Press one of the buttons for the driving position you want to recall until the buzzer sounds.

148

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■ To stop the position recall operation part-way through

Perform any of the following operations:

● Press the “SET” button.

● Press button “1” or “2”.

● Operate any of the seat adjustment switches (only cancels seat position recall).

● Operate the tilt and telescopic steering control switch (only cancels steering wheel position recall).

■ Seat positions that can be memorized (

 P. 142)

The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumbar support switch can be recorded.

■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the engine switch off

Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again.

■ In order to correctly use the driving position memory function

If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is operated in the same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different when it is recalled.

3-3. Adjusting the seats

149

Memory recall function

Each electronic key can be registered to recall your preferred driving position.

■ Registering procedure

Record your driving position to button 1 or 2 before performing the following:

Carry only the key you want to register, and then close the driver’s door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be recorded properly.

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Recall the driving position that you want to record.

While pressing the recalled button, press and hold the door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds.

■

If the button could not be registered, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.

Recall procedure

Make sure that the doors are locked before recalling the driving position. Carry the electronic key that has been registered to the driving position, and then unlock and open the driver’s door using the smart key system or wireless remote control.

The driving position will move to the recorded position (not including the steering wheel).

If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the seat and outside rear view mirrors will not move.

Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or IGNITION ON mode.

The seat and steering wheel will move to the recorded position.

150

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■ Cancelation procedure

Carry only the key you want to cancel and then close the driver’s door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

While pressing the “SET” button, press and hold the door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds twice.

If it button could not be canceled, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.

■ Recalling the driving position using the memory recall function

● Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore, the driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the key being carried.

● If a door other than the driver’s door is unlocked with the smart key system, the driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press the driving position button which has been set.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (

WARNING

■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

 Front seats and rear outboard seats

Pull the head restraint up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button



Rear center seat

Head restraints cannot be adjusted or removed.

■ Removing the head restraints

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.

If the head restraint touches the ceiling, making the removal difficult, change the seat back angle or, if possible, the seat height. (

 P. 142, 144)

Lock release button

151

152

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■ Installing the head restraints

 Front seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

Lock release button

 Rear outboard seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lowest lock position while pressing the lock release button.

■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

Lock release button

WARNING

■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.

● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

(However, if a head restraint interferes with installation of a child restraint system, the head restraint can be removed to accommodate the child restraint system:

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel

Adjustment procedure

 Manual type

Hold the steering wheel and push the lever down.

153

Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.

 Power type

Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:

Down

Toward the driver

Away from the driver

154

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Horn

To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.

■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when (power type)

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position (vehicles with driving position memory)

A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory system. (

 P. 146)

■ Power easy access system (vehicles with driving position memory)

The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with engine switch mode and the driver’s seat belt condition. (

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ After adjusting the steering wheel (manual type)

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and resulting in death or serious injury. Also, the horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Inside rear view mirror

155

The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.

Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

Anti-glare function

Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.

 Vehicles with garage door opener

 Vehicles without garage door opener

Indicator

Changing automatic anti-glare function mode

On/off

When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.

The function will set to ON mode each time the engine switch is turned to

IGNITION ON mode.

Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator also turns off.)

156

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

■ To prevent sensor error

 Vehicles without garage door opener

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

 Vehicles with garage door opener

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

WARNING

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjustment procedure

To select a mirror to adjust, turn the switch.

Left

Right

157

To adjust the mirror, operate the switch.

Right

Down

Left

Folding the mirrors

Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle’s rear.

158

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Linked mirror function when reversing (vehicles with driving position memory)

When the mirror select switch is in the “L” or “R” position, the outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground.

To disable this function, select neither “L” nor “R” of the mirror select switch.

■ Adjusting the mirror angle when the vehicle is reversing

With the shift lever in R, adjust the mirror angle at a desired position.

The adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will automatically tilt to the memorized angle whenever the shift lever is shifted to R from next time.

The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the normal position (angle adjusted with the shift lever in other than R). Therefore, if the normal position is changed after adjustment, the tilt position will also change.

When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing.

■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

■ When the mirrors are fogged up

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. ( 

P. 324)

■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving position memory)

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (

 P. 146)

■ Auto anti-glare function (driver’s side only) (if equipped)

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (

 P. 155)

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

159

WARNING

■ Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

■ When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.

■ When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

160

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

Power windows

Opening and closing procedures

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

Closing

One-touch closing *

Opening

One-touch opening *

: To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction.

Window lock switch

Press the switch to lock the passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

■ The power windows can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object becomes jammed between the window and the window frame while the window is closing, window movement is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

■ Catch protection function

If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window is opening, window movement is stopped.

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

161

■ When the window cannot be opened or closed

When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually and the door window cannot be opened or closed, perform the following operations with the power window switch of that door.

● Stop the vehicle. With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, within 4 seconds of the jam protection function or catch protection function activating, continuously operate the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction or one-touch opening direction so that the door window can be opened and closed.

● If the door window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the above operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction and completely close the door window.

Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the switch in the one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.

Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening direction. After the door window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for an additional 1 second or more.

Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the switch in the one-touch opening direction, and hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or more.

Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction again. After the door window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.

If the window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

162

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

■ Door lock linked window operation

● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.

(

● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.

(

: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

■ Alarm

The alarm may be triggered if the alarm is set and a power window is closed using the door lock linked power window operation function. (

 P. 81)

■ Power windows open warning buzzer

A buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the power windows open.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

163

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Opening and closing the windows

● The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the window lock switch.( 

P. 160)

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

● When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the power windows, operate the power window after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window. Also do not let a child operate window by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window.

● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

■ Jam protection function

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your body jammed in the window.

■ Catch protection function

● Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the catch protection function.

● The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or clothing caught in the window.

164

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

Moon roof



Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down.

Opening and closing

Opens the moon roof *

The moon roof stops slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise.

Press the switch again to fully open the moon roof.

Closes the moon roof *

: Lightly press either side of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

Tilting up and down

Tilts the moon roof up *

Tilts the moon roof down *

: Lightly press either side of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.



: If equipped

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

165

■ The moon roof can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

■ Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

■ Door lock linked moon roof operation

● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.

(

● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.

(

: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

166

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

■ When the moon roof does not close normally

Perform the following procedure:

● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.

* 1

The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.

* 2

Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “UP” switch

* 1

until the moon roof moves into the tilt up position and stops.

Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch again.

* 1

The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.

* 2

Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second.

Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

* 1

: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.

* 2

: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the

“CLOSE” or “UP” switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■ Alarm

The alarm may be triggered if the alarm is set and the moon roof is closed using the door lock linked moon roof operation function. (

 P. 80)

■ Moon roof open warning buzzer

A buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver's door is opened with the moon roof open.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (

Driving the vehicle............. 170

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

167

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■ Opening the moon roof

● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.

● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■ Opening and closing the moon roof

● The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations.

In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the moon roof.

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

● When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the moon roof, operate the moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, do not let a child operate moon roof by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the moon roof.

■ Jam protection function

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof is fully closed. Also, the jam protection function is not designed to operate while the switch is being pressed. Take care so that your fingers, etc. do not get caught.

168

3-5. Opening and closing the windows

169

Driving

4-1. Before driving

Cargo and luggage ........... 178

Vehicle load limits ............. 181

Trailer towing..................... 182

Dinghy towing ................... 183

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch ..... 184

Automatic transmission..... 189

Turn signal lever................ 195

Parking brake .................... 196

Brake Hold ........................ 200

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch ................ 202

Automatic High Beam ....... 206

Windshield wipers and washer ............................ 210

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap .................................. 214

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Toyota Safety Sense P ..... 218

PCS

(Pre-Collision System) .... 226

LDA

(Lane Departure Alert with steering control)....... 238

Dynamic radar cruise control 

with full-speed range............................... 248

BSM

(Blind Spot Monitor) ........ 261

• BSM function ................ 265

• RCTA function .............. 267

Rear Camera Detection function ........................... 272

Intuitive parking assist....... 276

Intelligent Clearance

Sonar (ICS)..................... 284

Driving mode select switches .......................... 305

Driving assist systems ...... 309

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips ............. 316

170

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Starting the engine

 P. 184

Driving

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.

( 

P. 189)

Release the parking brake. (

 P. 197)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Stopping

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. (

 P. 196), and shift the shift lever to P (

Parking the vehicle

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake (



189).

Press the engine switch to stop the engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

Starting off on a steep uphill

Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

4-1. Before driving

171

■ When starting off on a uphill

The hill-start assist control will activate. ( 

P. 309)

■ Driving in the rain

● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.

● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

■ Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.

This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.

● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill

● When the accelerator pedal is released

■ Restraining the engine output (Brake Override System)

● When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the engine output may be restrained.

● A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the system is operating.

■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control)

● When the following unusual operation is performed, the engine output may be restrained.

• When the shift lever is shifted from R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D, or P to

R (D includes S) with the accelerator pedal depressed, a warning message appears on the multi-information display.

• When the accelerator pedal is depressed too much while the vehicle is in reverse.

● While Drive-Start Control is being activated, your vehicle may have trouble escaping from the mud or fresh snow. In such case, deactivate TRAC (

 P.

311) to cancel Drive-Start Control so that the vehicle may become able to

escape from the mud or fresh snow.

■ Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:

● For the first 186 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

172

4-1. Before driving

■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. ( 

P. 474)

■ Eco-friendly driving



P. 107, 112

4-1. Before driving

173

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■ When driving the vehicle

● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way:

 P. 423

● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (

 P. 190)

● Do not adjust the display, the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

174

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle.

● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid.

● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.

■ When shifting the shift lever

● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Shifting the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.

● Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

4-1. Before driving

175

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When the vehicle is stopped

● Do not race the engine.

If the shift lever is any position other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.

● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

● Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

■ When the vehicle is parked

● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.

● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.

Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

176

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When the vehicle is parked

● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.

● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

■ When braking

● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

● If the brake booster device does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.

Have your brakes fixed immediately.

● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.

● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase.

Have your brakes fixed immediately.

4-1. Before driving

177

NOTICE

■ When driving the vehicle

● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain the engine output.

● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

Always set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time.

Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.

● The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire ( 

P. 445)

■ When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

● Engine stalling

● Short in electrical components

● Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:

● Brake function

● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transaxle, etc.

● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

178

4-1. Before driving

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5  150) =

650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

( 

P. 181)

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Calculation formula for your vehicle

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) ( 

P. 472)

4-1. Before driving

179

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B * 2

lb. (kg) - A * 1

lb. (kg) = C * 3

lb. (kg)

* 1

: A =Weight of people

* 2

: B =Total load capacity

* 3 : C =Available cargo and luggage load

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) - D * 4

lb. (kg) = E * 5

lb. (kg)

* 4

: D =Additional weight of people

* 5

: E =Available cargo and luggage load

As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

180

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:

● Receptacles containing gasoline

● Aerosol cans

■ Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.

● To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low, as close to the floor as possible.

● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.

• At the feet of the driver

• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

• On the package tray

• On the instrument panel

• On the dashboard

• Tray that has no lid

● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.

● When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind the front seats.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened.

■ Capacity and distribution

● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

4-1. Before driving

181

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.

◆ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): ( 

P. 472)

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

◆ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

◆ Towing capacity

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

◆

Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.

( 

P. 407)

WARNING

■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

182

4-1. Before driving

Trailer towing

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

4-1. Before driving

183

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

184

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the engine or changes engine switch modes.

Starting the engine

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be started.

Press the engine switch shortly and firmly.

When operating the engine switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.

The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 30 seconds, whichever is less.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started.

The engine can be started from any engine switch mode.

Stopping the engine

Stop the vehicle completely.

Set the parking brake ( 

P. 196), and shift the shift lever to P.

Press the engine switch.

Release the brake pedal and check that “ACCESSORY” or “IGNI-

TION ON” is not shown on the meter.

4-2. Driving procedures

185

Changing engine switch modes

Modes can be changed by pressing the engine switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

Off *

The emergency flashers can be used.

The multi-information display will not be displayed.

ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

A message indicating how to start the engine will be displayed on the multi-information display.

IGNITION ON mode

All electrical components can be used.

: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the engine, the engine switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.

When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P

If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to

ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:

Check that the parking brake is set.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Check that “Turn Power Off” is displayed on the multi-information display and then press the engine switch once.

Check that “Turn Power Off” on the multi-information display is turned off.

186

4-2. Driving procedures

■ Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI-

TION ON mode (with the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the engine switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.

■ Automatic engine shut off feature

● The vehicle is equipped with a feature that automatically shuts off the engine when the shift lever is in P with the engine running for an extended period.

● The engine will automatically shut off after approximately 1 hour if it has been left running while the shift lever is in P.

● The timer for the automatic engine shut off feature will reset if the brake pedal is depressed or if the shift lever is in a position other than P.

● After the vehicle is parked, if the door is locked with the door lock switch

(

 P. 127) from the inside or the mechanical key (



P. 459) from the outside,

the automatic engine shut off feature will be disabled. The timer for the automatic engine shut off feature will be re-enabled if the driver’s door is opened.

■ Electronic key battery depletion



P. 123

■ Conditions affecting operation



P. 137

■ Notes for the entry function



P. 138

■ If the engine does not start

● The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (

 P. 77)

Contact your Toyota dealer.

● Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the shift lever is displaced out of P.

■ Steering lock

After turning the engine switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the engine switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.

■ When the steering lock cannot be released

A message informing the driver that the steering wheel is locked will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the engine switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

4-2. Driving procedures

187

■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time.

In this case, refrain from operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.

■ When a message requesting the smart key system be inspected is displayed on the multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

■ If the electronic key battery is depleted



P. 414

■ Operation of the engine switch

● If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the engine switch mode may not change or the engine may not start.

● If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the engine switch off, the engine may not start in some cases. After turning the engine switch off, wait a few seconds before restarting the engine.

■ If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting



P. 459

WARNING

■ When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Caution while driving

If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Stopping the engine in an emergency

● If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. ( 

P. 423)

However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

● If the engine switch is operated while the vehicle is running, a warning message will be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer sounds.

● When restarting the engine after it was turned off while driving, shift the shift lever to N and press the engine switch.

188

4-2. Driving procedures

WARNING

■ When parking

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases to enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the engine.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

● Do not leave the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.

● If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is displayed on the multi-information display, the engine switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the engine switch off.

● Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may occur.

■ When starting the engine

● Do not race a cold engine.

● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the engine switch

If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

Automatic transmission

4-2. Driving procedures

Shifting the shift lever

189

While the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the brake pedal depressed * , shift the shift lever while pushing the shift release button on the shift knob.

Shift the shift lever while pushing the shift release button on the shift knob.

Shift the shift lever normally.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped and the brake pedal is depressed.

: For the vehicle be able to be shifted from P, the brake pedal must be depressed before the shift release button is pushed. If the shift release button is pushed first, the shift lock will not be released.

190

4-2. Driving procedures

Shift position purpose

Shift position Objective or function

Parking the vehicle/starting the engine

Reversing

Neutral

Normal driving

* 1

S mode driving

* 2

( 

P. 190)

* 1

: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for the driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recommended for normal driving.

* 2

: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear ranges, controls engine braking force, and prevents unnecessary upshifting.

Changing shift ranges in S mode

When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever or paddle shift switches (if equipped) can be operated as follows:

 Shift lever  Paddle shift switches (if equipped)

Upshifting

Downshifting

The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to 4, 5 or 6 according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 if AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position. ( 

P. 193)

4-2. Driving procedures

191

■ Shift ranges and their functions

Meter display

S2 - S8

Function

A gear in the range between 1 and the selected gear is automatically chosen depending on vehicle speed and driving conditions

Setting the gear at 1

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift range.

Selecting shift ranges in the D position (vehicles with paddle shift switches)

To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the paddle shift switch. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest gear, preventing upshifting and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.

Upshifting

Downshifting

The selected shift range, from 1 to

8, or D will be displayed on the multi-information display.

192

4-2. Driving procedures

■ Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position (vehicles with paddle shift switches)

Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:

● The “+” paddle shift switch is held down for a period of time

● When the vehicle comes to a stop

● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time

● When the shift lever is shifted to a position other than D

■ S mode

● When the shift range is 7 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift range to 8.

● To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur.

● To protect the automatic transmission, a function is adopted that automatically selects a higher shift range when the fluid temperature is high.

■ Downshift restriction warning buzzer (S mode or paddle shifting)

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever or paddle shift switches are operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)

■ When driving with dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range activated

Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not activate because dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range will not be canceled.

● While driving in D or S mode, downshifting to 7, 6, 5 or 4.

● When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in the D position. ( 

■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-start Control)

 P. 171

■ Shift lock system

The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever in starting.

The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in the

IGNITION ON mode the brake pedal is depressed and the shift release button is pushed.

4-2. Driving procedures

193

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted even though the brake pedal is depressed and the shift release button is pushed, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

Releasing the shift lock:

Set the parking brake.

Turn the engine switch off.

Depress the brake pedal.

Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool.

To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Press and hold the shift lock override button and then push the button on the shift knob.

The shift lever can be shifted while both buttons are pressed.

■ If the S indicator does not come on or the D indicator is displayed even after shifting the shift lever to S

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when the shift lever is in D.)

■ AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance and driving conditions.

The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in D. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position or paddle shifting cancels the function.)

194

4-2. Driving procedures

WARNING

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.

Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an accident.

■ To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock

Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking brake and depress the brake pedal.

If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal when the shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted out of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions

Right turn

Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it)

The right hand signals will flash 3 times.

Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it)

The left hand signals will flash 3 times.

Left turn

4-2. Driving procedures

195

■ Turn signals can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again.

■ To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change

Operate the lever in the opposite direction.

196

4-2. Driving procedures

Parking brake

A mode can be selected from the following modes.

Automatic mode

The parking brake is set or released automatically according to the shift lever operation.

Even when in automatic mode, the parking brake can be set and released manually. (

 P. 197)

Turns automatic mode on

(while the vehicle is stopped, pull and hold the parking brake switch until a message is shown on the multi-information display)

• When the shift lever is moved out of P, the parking brake will be released, and the parking brake indicator light and parking brake light turn off.

• When the shift lever is moved into P, the parking brake will be set, and the parking brake indicator light and parking brake light turn on.

Operate the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

* 1 * 2

Parking brake light

Turns automatic mode off (while the vehicle is stopped, press and hold the parking brake switch until a message is shown on the multi-information display)

Operate the parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal.

* 1

: For U.S.A.

* 2

: For Canada

4-2. Driving procedures

Manual mode

The parking brake can be set and released manually.

Sets the parking brake

The parking brake indicator light and parking brake light will turn on.

Pull and hold the parking brake switch if an emergency occurs and it is necessary to operate the parking brake while driving.

Releases the parking brake

Operate the parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal.

Make sure that the parking brake indicator light or parking brake light turn off.

If the parking brake indicator light and parking brake light flashes, operate the switch again.

( 

* 1

: For U.S.A.

* 2

: For Canada

* 1 * 2

Parking brake light

197

198

4-2. Driving procedures

■ Parking the vehicle



P. 170

■ Parking brake operation

● When the engine switch is not in IGNITION ON mode, the parking brake cannot be released using the parking brake switch.

● When the engine switch is not in IGNITION ON mode, automatic mode

(automatic brake setting and releasing) is not available.

■ Automatic release function

The parking brake is automatically released when slowly depress the accelerator pedal.

The parking brake will be released automatically under the following conditions:

● The driver’s door is closed.

● The driver’s seat belt is fastened.

● Shift the shift lever is in a forward or reverse position.

● The malfunction indicator lamp or brake system warning light is not illuminated.

If the automatic release function does not operate, manually release the parking brake.

■ If “Parking Brake Temporarily Unavailable” is displayed on the multiinformation display

If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system may restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operating the parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.

■ If “Parking Brake Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display

Operate the parking brake switch. If the message does not disappear after operating the switch several times, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ Parking brake operation sound

When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Parking brake indicator light and parking brake light

● Depending on the engine switch mode, the parking brake indicator light and parking brake light will turn on and stay on as described below:

IGNITION ON mode: Comes on until the parking brake is released.

Not in IGNITION ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.

● When the engine switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake indicator light and parking brake light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction.

4-2. Driving procedures

199

■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged.

“Release Parking Brake” is displayed on the multi-information display.

■ Warning messages and buzzers

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

■ If the brake system warning light comes on



P. 430

■ Usage in winter time



P. 316

WARNING

■ When parking the vehicle

Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone. The parking brake may be released unintentionally and there is the danger of the vehicle moving that may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Parking brake switch

Do not set any objects near the parking brake switch. Objects may interfere with the switch and may lead the parking brake to unexpectedly operate.

NOTICE

■ When parking the vehicle

Before you leave the vehicle, shift the shift lever to P, set the parking brake and make sure that the vehicle does not move.

■ When the system malfunctions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.

■ When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

200

4-2. Driving procedures

Brake Hold

The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift lever is in D, S or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to stop the vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator pedal is depressed with the shift lever in D or S to allow smooth start off.

Turns the brake hold system on

The brake hold standby indicator

(green) comes on. While the system is holding the brake, the brake hold operated indicator (yellow) comes on.

* 1

: Brake hold standby indicator

* 2

: Brake hold operated indicator * 1 * 2

■ Brake hold system operating conditions

The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following conditions:

● The driver’s door is not closed.

● The driver is not wearing the seat belt.

If any of the conditions above are detected when the brake hold system is enabled, the system will turn off and the brake hold standby indicator light will go off. In addition, if any of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brake, a warning buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. The parking brake will then be set automatically.

■ Brake hold function

● If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the system has started holding the brake, the parking brake will be set automatically. In this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display.

● To turn the system off while the system is holding the brake, firmly depress the brake pedal and press the button again.

● The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. A warning buzzer will sound and the multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

4-2. Driving procedures

201

■ When the parking brake is set automatically while the system is holding the brakes

Perform any of the following operations to release the parking brake.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. (The parking brake will not be released automatically if the seat belt is not fastened.)

● Operate the parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.

Make sure that the parking brake indicator light goes off. ( 

P. 196)

■ When an inspection at your Toyota dealer is necessary

When the brake hold standby indicator (green) does not illuminate even when the brake hold switch is pressed with the brake hold system operating conditions met, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.

■ Warning messages and buzzers

■ If the brake hold operated indicator flashes



P. 432

WARNING

■ When the vehicle is on a steep incline

When using the brake hold system on a steep incline, exercise caution. The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle in such a situation.

■ When stopped on a slippery road

The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the tires has been exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road.

NOTICE

■ When parking the vehicle

The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long period of time. Turning the engine switch off while the system is holding the brake may release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating the engine switch, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to P and set the parking brake.

202

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Operating instructions

Operating the switch turns on the lights as follows:

The headlights, daytime running lights

(

 P. 204) and all the

lights listed below turn on and off automatically.

(When the engine switch is in IGNITION

ON mode)

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and daytime running lights ( 

P. 204) turn

on.

The headlights and all the lights listed above

(except daytime running lights) turn on.

(For U.S.A.)

The daytime running lights turn off.

(

 P. 204)

* 1

: For U.S.A.

* 2

: For Canada

* 1 * 2

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

203

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

Cornering lights (if equipped)

● When the steering wheel or turn signal lever is operated while the headlights are on (low beam), a cornering light will turn on and light up the direction of movement of the vehicle. The cornering lights are designed to ensure excellent visibility when making a turn at an intersection.

However, when vehicle speed is approximately 93 mph (150 km/h) or higher, the cornering lights will not turn on.

● When the shift lever is in R while the headlights are on (low beam), both cornering lights will turn on. This is designed to enhance visibility when parking.

204

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Daytime running light system

● Type A:

The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the low beam headlights and illuminate dimmer than the low beam headlights.

Type B:

The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the parking lights and illuminate brighter than the parking lights.

● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.)

• The engine is running

• The parking brake is released

• The headlight switch is in the

: When the surroundings are bright

position

The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the parking brake is set again.

● For U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.

● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

■ Cornering lights (if equipped)

When the cornering lights are on for more than 30 minutes, they will turn off automatically.

■ Headlight control sensor

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

205

■ Automatic light off system

● When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and a door is opened and closed. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed twice after all the doors are closed.)

● When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and the driver’s door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or .

If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.

■ Light reminder buzzer (except when the light switch is in )

A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned off or turned to ACCES-

SORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.

■ Windshield wiper linked headlight illumination

When driving during daytime with the headlight switch turned to , if the windshield wipers are used, the headlights will turn on automatically after several seconds to help enhance the visibility of your vehicle.

■ Battery-saving function

In the following conditions, the remaining lights will go off automatically after

20 minutes in order to prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged:

● The headlights and/or tail lights are on.

● The engine switch is in ACCESSORY mode or turned off.

This function will be canceled in any of the following situations:

● When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

● When the light switch is operated

● When a door or the trunk is opened or closed

■ Welcome lighting

If the headlight switch is turned to and the surrounding area is dark, unlocking the doors using the smart key system or wireless remote control will turn the parking lights and tail lights on automatically.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

206

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Automatic High Beam

The Automatic High Beam uses a camera sensor located behind the upper portion of the windshield to assess the brightness of the lights of vehicles ahead, streetlights, etc., and automatically turns the high beams on or off as necessary.

WARNING

■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam

Do not overly rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning the high beams on or off manually if necessary.

■ To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system

Do not overload the vehicle.

Activating the Automatic High Beam

Push the lever away from you with the headlight switch in the

or position.

Press the Automatic High

Beam switch.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will come on when the system is operating.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Turning the high beams on/off manually

■ Switching to the low beams

Pull the lever to its original position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off.

Push the lever away from you to activate the Automatic High

Beam system again.

■ Switching to the high beams

Press the Automatic High

Beam switch.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on.

Press the switch to activate the

Automatic High Beam system again.

207

208

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Conditions to turn the high beams on/off automatically

● When all of the following conditions are met, the high beams will be turned on automatically (after approximately 1 second):

• The vehicle speed is approximately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.

• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.

• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.

• There are few streetlights on the road ahead.

● If any of the following conditions is met, the high beams will turn off automatically:

• The vehicle speed is below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).

• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.

• Vehicles ahead have their headlights or tail lights turned on.

• There are many streetlights on the road ahead.

■ Camera sensor detection information

● The high beams may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:

• When a vehicle suddenly appears from around a curve

• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle

• When vehicles ahead cannot be detected due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees

• When vehicles ahead appear in a faraway lane on a wide road

• When the lights of vehicles ahead are not on

● The high beams may be turned off if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without its headlights turned on is detected.

● House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs and other reflective objects may cause the high beams to change to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on.

● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken for the high beams to turn on or off:

• The brightness of the headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead

• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead

• When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side

• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle

• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)

• The number of passengers and amount of luggage in the vehicle

● The high beams may turn on or off unexpectedly.

● Bicycles or similar vehicles may not be detected.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

209

● In the following situations the system may not be able to correctly detect the surrounding brightness level. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high beams to flash or dazzle pedestrians or vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is necessary to manually switch between the high and low beams.

• When driving in inclement weather (heavy rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)

• When the windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.

• When the windshield is cracked or damaged

• When the camera sensor is deformed or dirty

• When the temperature of the camera sensor is extremely high

• When the surrounding brightness level is equal to that of headlights, tail lights or fog lights

• When headlights or tail lights of vehicles ahead are turned off, dirty, changing color, or not aimed properly

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle

• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness

• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads, etc.)

• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road

• When there is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or mirror

• When the back of a preceding vehicle is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck

• When the vehicle's headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly

• When the vehicle is listing or titling due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.

• When the headlights are changed between the high beams and low beams repeatedly in an abnormal manner

• When the driver believes that the high beams may be flashing or dazzling pedestrians or other drivers

■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.

Turn the engine switch off while the following conditions are met.

• The headlight switch is in .

• The headlight switch lever is in high beam position.

Turn the engine switch to the IGNITION ON mode.

Within 5 seconds after

, repeat pulling the headlight switch lever to the original position then pushing it to the high beam position quickly 9 times, then leave the lever in high beam position.

Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even when the vehicle is stopped.

210

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Windshield wipers and washer

Operating the wiper lever

Operating the lever operates the wipers or washer as follows:

When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the wiper interval can be also adjusted.

* 1 or * 2

Intermittent windshield wiper operation

The intermittent windshield wiper operates more frequently as vehicle speed becomes higher.

* 1 or * 2

Low speed windshield wiper operation

* 1 or * 2

High speed windshield wiper operation

* 1 or * 2

Temporary operation

* 1

: For U.S.A.

* 2

: For Canada

Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.

Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Washer/wiper dual operation

Pulling the lever operates the wipers and washer.

Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

(After operating several times, the wipers operate once more time after a short delay to prevent dripping. However, the dripping prevention does not operate while the vehicle is moving.)

211

■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

■ When stopping the engine in an emergency while driving

If the windshield wipers are operating when the engine is stopped, the windshield wipers will operate in high speed operation. After the vehicle is stopped, operation will return to normal when the engine switch is turned to

IGNITION ON mode, or operation will stop when the driver’s door is opened.

WARNING

■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.

■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

212

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Changing the windshield wiper rest position/Lifting the windshield wipers

When the windshield wipers are not being used, they retract to below the hood. To enable the windshield wipers to be lifted when parking in cold conditions or when replacing a windshield wiper insert, change the rest position of the windshield wipers to the service position using the wiper lever.

■ Raising the wipers to the service position

Within approximately 45 seconds of turning the engine switch off, move the wiper lever to the * 1 or * 2 position and hold it for approximately 2 seconds or more.

The wipers will move to the service position.

* 1

: For U.S.A.

* 2

: For Canada

■ Lifting the windshield wipers

While holding the hook portion of the wiper arm, lift the windshield wiper from the windshield.

Hook portion

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

213

■ Lowering the windshield wipers to the retracted position

With the windshield wipers placed on the windshield, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode and then move the wiper lever to an operating position. When the wiper switch is turned off, the windshield wipers will stop at the retracted position.

NOTICE

■ When lifting the windshield wipers

● Do not lift the windshield wipers when they are in the retracted position below the hood. Otherwise, they may contact the hood, possibly resulting in damage to a windshield wiper and/or the hood.

● Do not operate the wiper lever when the windshield wipers are lifted. Otherwise, the windshield wipers may contact the hood, possibly resulting in damage to the windshield wipers and/or hood.

214

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehicle

● Close all the doors and windows, and turn the engine switch off.

● Confirm the type of fuel.

■ Fuel types



P. 474, 481

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp illuminates

The malfunction indicator lamp may illuminate erroneously if refueling is performed repeatedly when the fuel tank is nearly full.

4-4. Refueling

215

WARNING

■ When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

■ When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:

● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.

● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.

● Do not top off the fuel tank.

NOTICE

■ Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface.

216

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Press the opener to open the fuel filler door.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to remove it and hang it on the back of the fuel filler door.

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

■ If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

Remove the cover inside the trunk and pull the lever.

4-4. Refueling

217

WARNING

■ When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

218

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Toyota Safety Sense P

The Toyota Safety Sense P consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:

◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System)

 P. 226

◆ LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)

 P. 238

◆ Automatic High Beam

 P. 206

◆ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

 P. 248

WARNING

■ Toyota Safety Sense P

The Toyota Safety Sense P is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings and driving safely.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

219

Vehicle data recording

The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer that will record certain data, such as:

• Accelerator status

• Brake status

• Vehicle speed

• Operation status of the pre-collision system functions

• Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead or other objects)

• Images from the camera sensor (available only when the pre-collision braking function or the pre-collision brake assist function was operating)

The pre-collision system does not record conversations, sounds or images of the inside of the vehicle.

● Data usage

Toyota may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased

• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency

• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit

• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner

● Recorded images can be erased using a specialized device.

The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the pre-collision system operates will not be available.

220

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Sensors

Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield, detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.

Radar sensor

Camera sensor

4-5. Using the driving support systems

221

WARNING

■ To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times.

Radar sensor

Front grille emblem

If the front of the radar sensor or the front or back of the front grille emblem is dirty or covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean it.

Clean the radar sensor and front grille emblem with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.

● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or other items to the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.

● Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● Do not disassemble the radar sensor.

● Do not modify or paint the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.

● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and installed, or replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

222

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■ To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Keep the windshield clean at all times.

• If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc., clear the windshield.

• If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor.

• If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed is dirty, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not attach objects, such as stickers, transparent stickers, and so forth, to the outer side of the windshield in front of the camera sensor (shaded area in the illustration).

A: From the top of the windshield to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the bottom of the camera sensor

B: Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm)

(Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the right and left from the center of the camera sensor)

● If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation or ice. (

 P. 324)

● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade.

If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.

● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.

If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not get the camera sensor wet.

● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor.

● Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor.

When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.

If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Toyota dealer.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

223

WARNING

● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.

● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it.

● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.

● Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor

(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.

● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the hood, front grille or front bumper. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the camera sensor.

● Do not modify the headlights or other lights.

224

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Certification

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 For vehicles sold in Canada

225

226

4-5. Using the driving support systems

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and camera sensor to detect vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehicle.

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.

The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. ( 

P. 230)

◆ Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the multiinformation display to urge the driver to take evasive action.

◆ Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.

◆ Pre-collision braking

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system warns the driver. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the collision speed.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

227

◆ Suspension control (if equipped)

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the Adaptive Variable Suspension System (

 P. 310)

will control the damping force of the shock absorbers to help maintain an appropriate vehicle posture.

228

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■ Limitations of the pre-collision system

● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance.

Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.

• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision: 

P. 232

• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: 

P. 234

● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself.

Depending on the objects used for testing (dummies, cardboard objects imitating detectable objects, etc.), the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.

■ Pre-collision braking

● When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force will be applied.

● If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary.

● The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.

● In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.

● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking function.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

229

WARNING

■ When to disable the pre-collision system

In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

● When the vehicle is being towed

● When your vehicle is towing another vehicle

● When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation

● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the engine running and the tires are allowed to rotate freely

● When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer

● When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to an accident or other reasons

● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning

● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road

● When the tires are not properly inflated

● When the tires are very worn

● When tires of a size other than specified are installed

● When tire chains are installed

● When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used

● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or camera sensor is temporarily installed to the vehicle

230

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Changing settings of the pre-collision system

■ Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system

The pre-collision system can be enabled/disabled on ( 

of the multi-information display.

The system is automatically enabled each time the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

If the system is disabled, the

PCS warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

■ Changing the pre-collision warning timing

The pre-collision warning timing can be changed on ( 

P. 311), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision

of the multi-information display.

The operation timing setting is retained when the engine switch is turned off.

Far

The warning will begin to operate earlier than with the default timing.

Middle

This is the default setting.

Near

The warning will begin to operate later than with the default timing.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

231

■ Operational conditions

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high.

Each function is operational at the following speeds:

● Pre-collision warning:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.

● Pre-collision brake assist:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 50 mph [30 and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.

● Pre-collision braking:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.

The system may not operate in the following situations:

● If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time

● If the shift lever is in R

● If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)

■ Pedestrian detection function

The pre-collision system detects pedestrians based on the size, profile, and motion of a detected object. However, a pedestrian may not be detected depending on the surrounding brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of the detected object, preventing the system from operating properly. ( 

P. 236)

■ Cancelation of the pre-collision braking

If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled:

● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.

● The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.

232

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.

• When passing a vehicle or pedestrian

• When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle

• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes

• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is making a left/right turn

• When passing a vehicle in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn

• When driving on a road where relative location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent lane may change, such as on a winding road

• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is uneven or undulating

• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility poles, trees, or walls

• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, or object by the roadside at the entrance of a curve

• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge

4-5. Using the driving support systems

233

• When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion on the road surface or roadside

• When a crossing pedestrian approaches very close to the vehicle

• When passing through a place with a low structure above the road (low ceiling, traffic sign, etc.)

• When passing under an object (billboard, etc.) at the top of an uphill road

• When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other barrier that opens and closes

• When using an automatic car wash

• When driving through or under objects that may contact the vehicle, such as thick grass, tree branches, or a banner

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When there are patterns or paint on the road or a wall that may be mistaken for a vehicle or pedestrian

• When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or guardrail

• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present

234

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly

● In some situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:

• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle

• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle

• When approaching the side or front of a vehicle

• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck

• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end, such as a low bed trailer

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper

• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high ground clearance

• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car

• If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead

• If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle

• If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration)

• When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle

• When a vehicle ahead is not directly in front of your vehicle

• When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel

4-5. Using the driving support systems

235

• When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines directly into the camera sensor

• When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a tunnel

• After the engine has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time

• While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/ right turn

• While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve

• If your vehicle is skidding

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered

• If the wheels are misaligned

• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor

• The vehicle is wobbling.

• The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.

• When driving on a hill

• If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned

● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:

• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet

• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)

• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface

236

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● Some pedestrians such as the following may not be detected by the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:

• Pedestrians shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)

• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their silhouette obscure

• Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc., hiding part of their body

• Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting

• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle

• Groups of pedestrians which are close together

• Pedestrians who are wearing white and look extremely bright

• Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night or while in a tunnel

• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as their surroundings

• Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects

• Pedestrians who are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) on the road

• Pedestrians who are walking fast

• Pedestrians who are changing speed abruptly

• Pedestrians running out from behind a vehicle or a large object

• Pedestrians who are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside rear view mirror, etc.)

■ If the PCS warning light flashes or illuminates and a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display

The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.

● In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating conditions return:

• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is hot, such as in the sun

• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is cold, such as in an extremely cold environment

• When a front sensor is dirty or covered with snow, etc.

• When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice

(Defogging the windshield:

 P. 324)

• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is attached to the windshield near the camera sensor

● If the PCS warning light continues to flash or remains illuminated or the warning message does not disappear even though the vehicle has returned to normal, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

237

■ If VSC is disabled

● If VSC is disabled ( 

braking functions are also disabled.

● The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake

System Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

238

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)

Summary of functions

When driving on highways and freeways with white (yellow) lines, this function alerts the driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane and provides assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its lane.

The LDA system recognizes visible white (yellow) lines with the camera sensor on the upper portion of the windshield.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Functions included in LDA system

◆ Lane departure alert function

When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver.

When the warning buzzer sounds, check the surrounding road situation and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane.

239

◆ Steering control function

When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane, the system provides assistance as necessary by operating the steering wheel in small amounts for a short period of time to keep the vehicle in its lane.

If the system detects that the steering wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the function is temporarily canceled.

240

4-5. Using the driving support systems

◆ Vehicle sway warning function

When the vehicle is swaying or appears as if it may depart from its lane multiple times, the warning buzzer sounds and a message is displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver.

WARNING

■ Before using LDA system

Do not rely solely upon the LDA system. The LDA system does not automatically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.

Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ To avoid operating LDA system by mistake

When not using the LDA system, use the LDA switch to turn the system off.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

241

WARNING

■ Situations unsuitable for LDA system

Do not use the LDA system in the following situations.

The system may not operate properly and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped.

● When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.

● Tires which differ by structure, manufacturer, brand or tread pattern are used.

● Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are present on the side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.).

● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.

● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.

● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc. are present due to road repair.

● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction work.

● Vehicle is driven on a road surface which is slippery due to rainy weather, fallen snow, freezing, etc.

● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other than on highways and freeways.

● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.

■ Preventing LDA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake

● Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the lights.

● Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).

● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Toyota dealer.

242

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Turning LDA system on

Press the LDA switch to turn the

LDA system on.

The LDA indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the LDA switch again to turn the LDA system off.

When the LDA system is turned on or off, operation of the LDA system continues in the same condition the next time the engine is started.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

243

Indications on multi-information display

The illustration used is intended as an example, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the multi-information display.

LDA indicator

The illumination condition of the indicator informs the driver of the system operation status.

Illuminated in white:

LDA system is operating.

Illuminated in green:

Steering wheel assistance of the steering control function is operating.

Flashing in amber:

Lane departure alert function is operating.

Operation display of steering wheel operation support

Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering control function is operating.

Lane departure alert function display

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information screen.

 Inside of displayed white lines is white

 Inside of displayed white lines is black

Indicates that the system is recognizing white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from flashes yellow.

Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) lines or is temporarily canceled.

244

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Operation conditions of each function

● Lane departure alert function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

• LDA is turned on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.

• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

• Turn signal lever is not operated.

• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius of more than approximately 492 ft. (150 m).

• No system malfunctions are detected. (

 P. 247)

● Steering control function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.

• Setting for “Steering Assist” in of the multi-information display is set to

“On”. ( 

• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated by a certain amount or more.

• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.

• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.

• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.

• Hands off steering wheel warning is not displayed. (

 P. 245)

● Vehicle sway warning function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

• Setting for “Sway Warning” in of the multi-information display is set to

“On”. ( 

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

• No system malfunctions are detected. (

 P. 247)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

245

■ Temporary cancellation of functions

When the operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the function is automatically restored. (

 P. 244)

■ Steering control function

Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road conditions, etc., the driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all.

■ Lane departure alert function

The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc.

■ Hands off steering wheel warning

When the system determines that the driver has removed their hands from the steering wheel while the steering control function is operating, a warning message urging the driver to hold the steering wheel and the symbol shown in the illustration are displayed on the multi-information display.

If the driver continues to keep their hands off of the steering wheel, a warning message and the symbol shown in the illustration are displayed on the multiinformation display, and the function is temporarily canceled.

This warning also operates in the same way when the driver continuously operates the steering wheel only a small amount. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel when using this system, regardless of warnings.

Depending on the vehicle and road conditions, the warning may not operate.

■ Vehicle sway warning function

When the system determines that the vehicle is swaying while the vehicle sway warning function is operating, a buzzer sounds and a warning message urging the driver to rest and the symbol shown in the illustration are simultaneously displayed on the multi-information display.

Depending on the vehicle and road conditions, the warning may not operate.

■ White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road

The LDA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines could not be recognized.

246

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly

In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow) lines and various functions may not operate normally.

● There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white

(yellow) lines.

● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.

● The white (yellow) lines are cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or stones are present.

● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.

● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.

● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are white).

● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.

● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.

● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.

● The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.

● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.

● The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.

● The vehicle is driven on a slope.

● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.

● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.

● The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.

● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.

● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire pressure.

● The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.

● The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams).

● The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the beam axis has deviated.

● The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.

● The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.

● Snow tires, etc. are equipped.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

247

■ Warning message

If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and the LDA indicator illuminates in amber, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.

Warning message

“LDA Malfunction

Visit Your Dealer”

“Front Camera Unavailable”

“LDA Unavailable”

“LDA Unavailable Below

Approx. 32MPH”

Details/Actions

The system may not be operating properly.

 Have the vehicle inspected at your

Toyota dealer.

The operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are not met.

 When the operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are met, the LDA system will become available. Turn the LDA system off, wait for a little while, and then turn the LDA system back on.

The LDA system is temporarily canceled due to a malfunction in a sensor other than the camera sensor.

 Turn the LDA system off and follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedures for the warning message. Afterward, drive the vehicle for a short time, and then turn the

LDA system back on.

The LDA system cannot be used as the vehicle speed is less than approximately 32 mph (50 km/h).

 Drive the vehicle at approximately

32 mph (50 km/h) or more.

If a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the screen. ( 

P. 443)

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (

P. 257), the set speed will be

248

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Dynamic radar cruise control



with fullspeed range

Summary of functions

In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates, decelerates and stops to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.

Use the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range on freeways and highways.

● Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ( 

P. 251)

● Constant speed control mode ( 

P. 257)

■ Meter display

Display

Set speed

Indicators

■ Operation switches

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch

“+ RES” switch

Cruise control main switch

Cancel switch

“- SET” switch

4-5. Using the driving support systems

249

WARNING

■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

● Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the system, and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings.

● The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range provides driving assistance to reduce the driver's burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.

Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.

• When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead:



P. 259

• Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly: 

P. 260

● Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for checking the set speed.

● Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding vehicle as detected by the system may differ from the condition observed by the driver. Therefore, the driver must always remain alert, assess the danger of each situation and drive safely. Relying on this system or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Switch the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range off using the cruise control main switch when not in use.

■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems

Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance provided by the system.

Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Assisting the driver to measure following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.

● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range determines whether the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.

250

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range has limited capability to prevent or avoid a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclists, etc.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● At entrances to freeways and highways

● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)

● When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar sensor or camera sensor

● In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and deceleration

● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often

4-5. Using the driving support systems

251

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead.

Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on downhill slopes.

Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-tovehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.

Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising

When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.

Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pressing the

“+ RES” switch or depressing the accelerator pedal will resume follow-up cruising.

252

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Example of acceleration

When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set speed

The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Press the cruise control main switch to activate the cruise control.

Dynamic radar cruise control indicator will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the switch again to deactivate the cruise control.

If the cruise control main switch is pressed and held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system turns on in constant speed control mode. ( 

P. 257)

Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 30 mph

[50 km/h]) and press the “- SET” switch to set the speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the switch is released becomes the set speed.

If the switch is operated while the vehicle speed is below approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) and a preceding vehicle is present, the set speed will be adjusted to approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).

4-5. Using the driving support systems

253

Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, operate the “+ RES” or “- SET” switch until the desired set speed is displayed.

Increases the speed

(Except when the vehicle has been stopped by system control in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Press the switch.

Large adjustment: Press and hold the switch to change the speed, and release when the desired speed is reached.

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

 For U.S. mainland and Hawaii

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) the switch is pressed

* 1

or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)

* 2

each time

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

* 1

or 1 km/h

(0.6 mph)

* 2

increments for as long as the switch is held

 For Canada, Guam and Puerto Rico

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

* 1

or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)

* 2

each time the switch is pressed

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)

(3.1 mph)

* 2

increments for as long as the switch is held

* 1

or 5 km/h

In the constant speed control mode ( 

increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

* 1

or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)

* 2

each time the switch is pressed

Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the switch is held.

* 1

: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”

* 2

: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

254

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Pressing the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

Long

Medium

Short

Preceding vehicle mark

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the engine switch is turned to

IGNITION ON mode.

If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be displayed.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.

When the vehicle is stopped by system control, the vehicle stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle distance depending on the situation.

Distance options

Long

Medium

Short

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)

Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)

Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

255

Resuming follow-up cruising when the vehicle has been stopped by system control (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

After the vehicle ahead of you starts off, press the “+ RES” switch.

Your vehicle will also resume follow-up cruising if the accelerator pedal is depressed after the vehicle ahead of you starts off.

Canceling and resuming the speed control

Pressing the cancel switch cancels the speed control.

The speed control is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed.

(When the vehicle has been stopped by system control, depressing the brake pedal does not cancel the setting.)

Pressing the “+ RES” switch resumes the cruise control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed.

However, when a vehicle ahead is not detected, cruise control does not resume when the vehicle speed is approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.

256

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle.

Depress the brake pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicle-tovehicle distance.

■ Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is small.

● When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle speed

● When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed

● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set

● When depressing the accelerator pedal

4-5. Using the driving support systems

257

Selecting constant speed control mode

When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due to a dirty radar sensor, etc.

With the cruise control off, press and hold the cruise control main switch for 1.5 seconds or more.

Immediately after the switch is pressed, the radar cruise control indicator will come on. Afterwards, it switches to the cruise control indicator.

Switching to constant speed control mode is only possible when operating the switch with the cruise control off.

Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 25 mph

[40 km/h]) and press the “- SET” switch to set the speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the switch is released becomes the set speed.

Adjusting the speed setting: 

P. 253

Canceling and resuming the speed setting: 

P. 255

258

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set when

● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift switch.

(vehicles with paddle shift switches)

● Vehicle speed is at or above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h). However, when a preceding vehicle is detected, the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set even if the vehicle speed is below approximately

30 mph (50 km/h).

■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.

■ When the vehicle stops while follow-up cruising

● Pressing the “+ RES” switch while the vehicle ahead stops will resume follow-up cruising if the vehicle ahead starts off within approximately 3 seconds after the switch is pressed.

● If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 seconds after your vehicle stops, follow-up cruising will be resumed.

■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations.

● Actual vehicle speed falls at or below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) when there are no vehicles ahead.

● The preceding vehicle leaves the lane when your vehicle is following at a vehicle speed at or below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). Otherwise, the sensor can not properly detect the vehicle. (“Radar Cruise Control Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display)

● VSC is activated.

● TRAC is activated for a period of time.

● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.

● The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.

● Pre-collision braking is activated.

● The parking brake is operated.

● The vehicle is stopped by system control on a steep incline.

● The following are detected when the vehicle has been stopped by system control:

• The driver is not wearing a seat belt.

• The driver’s door is opened.

• The vehicle has been stopped for about 3 minutes

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

259

■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode

Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:

● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed.

● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

● VSC is activated.

● TRAC is activated for a period of time.

● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.

● Pre-collision braking is activated.

If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Brake system operation sound

If the brakes are applied automatically while the vehicle is in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, a brake system operation sound may be heard.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning ( 

P. 256) may not be activated.

● Vehicles that cut in suddenly

● Vehicles traveling at low speeds

● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane

● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)

260

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of the sensor

● When your vehicle is pointing upwards

(caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.)

● Preceding vehicle has an extremely high ground clearance

■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly

In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system may not operate properly.

● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow

● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable

● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly

● When driving on a road surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on a bridge

● While the vehicle speed is decreasing to the set speed after the vehicle accelerates by depressing the accelerator pedal

4-5. Using the driving support systems

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor

The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions;

● The BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) function

Assists the driver in making a decision when changing lanes

● The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function

Assists the driver when backing up

These functions use same sensors.

261

Multi-information display

Turning the BSM function/RCTA function on/off. ( 

P. 262)

Outside rear view mirror indicators

BSM function:

When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator comes on while the turn signal lever is not operated and the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes while the turn signal lever is operated.

RCTA function:

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, the outside rear view mirror indicators flash.

“BSM” indicator/“RCTA” indicator

When the BSM function/RCTA function is turned on, the indicator illuminates.

262

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Audio system screen (RCTA function only)

If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the RCTA icon ( 

P. 268) for the detected side will be displayed.

RCTA buzzer ( RCTA function only)

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, a buzzer sounds from behind the rear seat.

Turning the BSM function/RCTA function on/off

Press / of the meter control switches, select .

Press / of the meter control switched, select or .

Press

Each time

of the meter control switch.

is pressed, the function changes on/off.

■ The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility

When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.

■ RCTA buzzer hearing

RCTA function may be difficult to hear over loud noises such as high audio volume.

■ When “Blind Spot Monitor Unavailable” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Unavailable” are shown on the multi-information display

Ice, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to the rear bumper around the sensors.

( 

P. 264)

The system should return to normal operation after removing the ice, snow, mud, etc., from the rear bumper. Additionally, the sensors may not operate normally when driving in extremely hot or cold environments.

■ When there is a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor

If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, a warning message will be displayed:

● There is a malfunction with the sensors

● The sensors have become dirty

● The outside temperature is extremely high or low

● The sensor voltage has become abnormal

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

263

 For vehicles sold in Canada

264

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■ Handling the radar sensor

One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the

Blind Spot Monitor can function correctly.

● Keep the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper clean at all times. If a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the Blind Spot Monitor may not operate and a warning message will be displayed. ( 

P. 262)

In this situation, clear off the dirt or snow and drive the vehicle with the operation conditions of the BSM function satisfied for approximately 60 minutes.

If the warning message does not disappear, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

● Do not subject a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper to a strong impact.

If a sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles may not be detected correctly.

In the following situations, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• A sensor or its surrounding area is subject to a strong impact.

• If the surrounding area of a sensor is scratched or dented, or part of them has become disconnected.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.

● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

● Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Toyota color.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

265

BSM function

The BSM function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is usually not reflected in the outside rear view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles existence via the outside rear view mirror indicator.

BSM function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The range of the detection area extends to:

Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from the side of the vehicle

The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle is not in the detection area

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper

Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the use of the system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The BSM function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the BSM function.

The function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

■ The BSM function is operational when

● The BSM function is turned on

● Vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

■ The BSM function will detect a vehicle when

● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.

● You overtake a vehicle in adjacent lane slowly.

● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.

266

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions under which the BSM function will not detect a vehicle

The BSM function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.

● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects

● Following vehicles that are in the same lane

● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle

● Vehicles which are being overtaken rapidly by your vehicle

: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■ Conditions under which the BSM function may not function correctly

● The BSM function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area

• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow, etc.

• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc., is covering the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper

• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water, snow, etc.

• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area

• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection area as your vehicle accelerates

• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the road, etc.

• When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces

• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle

• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away from your vehicle

• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle

• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area

• Immediately after the BSM function is turned on

4-5. Using the driving support systems

267

● Instances of the BSM function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase under the following conditions:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area

• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc.

• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle

• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle enters the detection area

• When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces

• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle

RCTA function

The RCTA functions when your vehicle is in reverse. It can detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle. It uses radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehicle’s existence through flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.

Approaching vehicles

Detection areas

268

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ RCTA icon display

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the following will be displayed on the audio system screen.

Toyota parking assist monitor

Panoramic view monitor

Content

A vehicle is approaching from the left or right at the rear of the vehicle

: The RCTA function is malfunctioning (

 P. 262)

WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the use of the system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The RCTA function is only an assist and is not a replacement for careful driving. Driver must be careful when backing up, even when using RCTA function. The driver’s own visual confirmation of behind you and your vehicle is necessary and be sure there are no pedestrians, other vehicles, etc., before backing up. Failure to do so could cause death or serious injury.

According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

RCTA function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

269

To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert for faster vehicles from farther away.

Example:

Approaching vehicle

Fast

Slow

Speed

18 mph (28 km/h)

5 mph (8 km/h)

Approximate alert distance

65 ft. (20 m)

18 ft. (5.5 m)

■ The RCTA function is operational when

● The RCTA function is turned on.

● The shift lever is in R.

● Vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

● Approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and

18 mph (28 km/h).

270

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions under which the RCTA function will not detect a vehicle

The RCTA function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.

● Vehicles approaching from directly behind

● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to obstructions

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects

● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle

● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle

● Vehicles backing up in the parking space next to your vehicle

: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■ Conditions under which the RCTA function may not function correctly

● The RCTA function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area

• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc., is covering the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper

• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow, etc.

• When multiple vehicles approach continuously

• Shallow angle parking

• When a vehicle is approaching at high speed

• When parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road, etc.

• Immediately after the RCTA function is turned on

• Immediately after the engine is started with the RCTA function on.

● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to obstructions

• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle

4-5. Using the driving support systems

271

● Instances of the RCTA function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase in the following situations:

• When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle

• When the parking space faces a street and vehicles are being driven on the street

• When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of the vehicle, is short

● When there are spinning objects near your vehicle such as the fan of an air conditioning unit

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (

 P. 100, 498)

272

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Rear Camera Detection function (vehicles with panoramic view monitor)



When the vehicle is backing up, the rear camera detection function can detect pedestrians in the detection area behind the vehicle. If a pedestrian is detected, a buzzer will sound and an icon on the audio system screen will be displayed to inform the driver of the pedestrian.

Display

Pedestrian detection icon

Displayed automatically when a pedestrian is detected.

Mute switch

Select to mute the buzzer. The buzzer will be re-enabled when the shift lever is shifted to a position other than R.



: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When a pedestrian is detected

If the rear camera detection function detects a pedestrian in the detection area, the buzzer and icon will operate as shown in the following table:

273

Area

Buzzer

Sounds repeatedly

When the vehicle is stationary:

Sounds 3 times

When the vehicle is backing up:

Sounds repeatedly

When it is determined that a pedestrian will enter area

1 within a few seconds: Sounds repeatedly

Icon

Blinks 3 times and then stays on

When it is determined that a pedestrian will enter area

1 within a few seconds: Blinks 3 times and then stays on

■ The rear camera detection function is operational when

The rear camera detection function is operational when the following conditions are met:

● The engine switch is in the IGNITION ON mode.

● The shift lever is in R.

■ Setting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume of this function changes with the RCTA buzzer volume.

( 

P. 100, 498)

■ If the rear camera detection function is malfunctioning

If a malfunction of the rear camera detection function is detected, one of the following messages will be displayed on the audio system screen. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● “RCD malfunction.”

● “Visit your dealer.”

● “RCD unavailable.”

274

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ If “Clean dirt from lens” is displayed on the audio system screen

A rear camera lens may be dirty or covered with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is removed from the rear camera lens, the system should return to normal.

(It may be necessary to drive the vehicle for some time before the system returns to normal.)

■ If “RCD unavailable” is displayed on the audio system screen

● If this message is displayed after the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, fully turn the steering wheel to the left and then the right on level ground.

● If this message is displayed only when the R shift position is selected, the rear camera lens may be dirty. Clean the rear camera lens.

■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly

● Some pedestrians, such as the following, may not be detected by the rear camera detection function, preventing the function from operating properly:

• Pedestrians who are squatting

• Pedestrians who are lying down

• Pedestrians who are running

• Pedestrians who suddenly enter the detection area

• Pedestrians riding a bicycle, skateboard, or other light vehicle

• Pedestrians wearing unusual clothing, such as a costume

• Pedestrians whose body is partially hidden by a cart or other object

• Pedestrians which are obscured by darkness, such as at night

● In some situations, such as the following, pedestrians may not be detected by the rear camera detection function, preventing the function from operating properly:

• When backing up in inclement weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)

• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched

• When a very bright light, such as the sun, or the headlights of another vehicle, shines directly into the rear camera

• When backing up in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a garage or underground parking lot

4-5. Using the driving support systems

275

● In some situations, such as the following, the rear camera detection function may operate even though there are no pedestrians in the detection area.

• When a three dimensional object, such as a pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehicle, is detected

• When a moving object, such as a car or motorcycle is detected

• When backing up toward moving objects such as flags or puddles, or airborne matter, such as smoke, steam, rain, or snow

• When there is a pattern on the road, due to the road being made of cobblestone or gravel or having tram rails, traces of repair, white lines, pedestrian crossings or fallen leaves on the surface

• When backing up on a metal cover (grating), such as those used for drainage ditches

• When backing up toward the roadside or a bump in the road

• When an object is reflected in a puddle or on a wet road surface

• When there are shadows on the road

• When backing up over a bump in the road

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted, such as when carrying a heavy load

• When backing up toward an incline/decline

• If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed

• If the rear of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load

• If an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate or rear fog light, is installed near the rear camera

• If a bumper protector, such as an additional trim strip, is installed to the rear bumper

• If the orientation of the rear camera has been changed due to a collision or other impact, or removal and installation

• If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of the vehicle

• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched

• When water is flowing over the rear camera lens

• If there is a flashing light in the detection area, such as the emergency flashers of another vehicle

■ Situations in which the rear camera detection function may be difficult to notice

● If buzzer may be difficult to hear if the surrounding area is noisy, the volume of the audio system volume is high, the air conditioning system is being used, etc.

● If the temperature in the cabin is extremely high or low, the audio system screen may not operate correctly.

276

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Intuitive parking assist



The distance from your vehicle to nearby objects when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via the displays and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.

Types of sensors

Front corner sensors

Front center sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

Turning the intuitive parking assist on/off

Press / of the meter control switches, select .

Press / of the meter con-

3 trol switches, select .

Press trol switch.

of the meter con-

Each time is pressed, the function changes on/off.

When on, the indicator light comes on to inform the driver that the system is operational.



: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

277

Display

When the sensors detect an object, the following displays inform the driver of the position and distance to the object.

■ Multi-information display

Front corner sensor operation

Front center sensor operation

Rear corner sensor operation

Rear center sensor operation

Select to mute the buzzer sounds.

■ Audio system screen

Intuitive parking assist

When the vehicle is moving backward.

A simplified image is displayed on the upper part of the screen when an object is detected.

■ Muting the buzzer sound

● To mute the buzzer sound

The buzzer can be temporarily muted by pressing of the meter control switches while an object detection display is shown on the multi-information display.

● To cancel the mute

Mute will be automatically cancelled in the following situations.

• When the shift position is changed

• When the vehicle speed has reached or exceeded approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h) with the shift lever in D

• When the intuitive parking assist is turned off once and turned on again

• When the engine switch is turned off once and turned to IGNITION ON mode again

• When a sensor is malfunctioning

278

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Sensor detection display, object distance

■ Distance display

Sensors that detect an object will illuminate continuously or blink.

Multiinformation display

Insert display

(continuous) (blinking slowly)

(continuous) (blinking)

Far

Approximate distance to object

Front and rear center sensor

Front and rear corner sensor

Front center sensor:

3.3 ft. (100 cm) to

2.4 ft. (73 cm)

Rear center sensor:

4.9 ft. (150 cm) to

2.5 ft. (75 cm)



Front center sensor:

2.4 ft. (73 cm) to

1.5 ft. (45 cm)

Rear center sensor:

2.5 ft. (75 cm) to

1.5 ft. (45 cm)

2.6 ft. (80 cm) to

1.5 ft. (45 cm)

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to

1.1 ft. (35 cm)

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to

1.1 ft. (35 cm)

(continuous) (blinking rapidly)

Less than

1.1 ft. (35 cm)

Less than

1.1 ft. (35 cm)

(blinking) (continuous) Near

: The images may differ from those shown in the illustrations. (

 P. 277)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

279

■ Buzzer operation and distance to an object

A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.

● The buzzer sounds faster as the vehicle approaches an object.

When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the object, the buzzer sounds continuously: Approximately 1.2 ft. (35 cm).

● When 2 or more objects are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest object. If one or both come within the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast beeps.

Detection range of the sensors

Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)

Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)

Approximately 2.6 ft. (80 cm)

The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect objects that are extremely close to the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object, etc.

280

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ The intuitive parking assist can be operated when

● Front corner sensors:

• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

• The shift lever is in other than P.

• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).

● Front center sensors:

• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

• The shift lever is in other than P or R.

• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).

● Rear corner and rear center sensors:

• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

• The shift lever is in R.

• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).

■ Intuitive parking assist display

When an object is detected while the Toyota parking assist monitor or panoramic view monitor is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the upper part of the screen even if the display setting has been set to off.

■ Sensor detection information

● The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s bumper.

● Depending on the shape of the object and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.

● Objects may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.

● There will be a short delay between object detection and display. Even at slow speeds, there is a possibility that the object will come within the sensor’s detection areas before the display is shown and the buzzer sounds.

● Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once.

● It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow noise of the air conditioning system.

■ If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected

The system needs to be initialized.

To initialize the system, drive the vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds or more at a speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or more.

■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable Clean Parking Assist Sensor” is displayed on the multi-information display

A sensor may be dirty or covered with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is removed from the sensor, the system should return to normal.

Also, due to the sensor being frozen at low temperatures, a malfunction display may appear or an object may not be detected. If the sensor thaws out, the system should return to normal.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

281

■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display

● Water may be continuously flowing over the sensor surface, such as in a heavy rain. When the system determines that it is normal, the system will return to normal.

● Initialization may not have been performed after a battery terminal was disconnected and reconnected. Initialize the system. If this message continues to be displayed even after initialization, have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

■ Certification

 For vehicles sold in Canada

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (

 P. 100, 498)

WARNING

■ When using the intuitive parking assist

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.

● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).

● The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving forward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s speed.

● Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.

282

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■ Sensors

Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect an object. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below.

● There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this problem.)

● The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)

In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal display, or objects may not be detected.

● The sensor is covered in any way.

● The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.

● On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.

● The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.

● There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.

● The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.

● The sensor is drenched with water on a flooded road.

● The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.

● Towing eyelets are installed.

● The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.

● The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.

● The detection range is reduced due to an object such as a sign.

● In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.

● The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.

● If objects draw too close to the sensor.

● A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension, etc.) is installed.

● A backlit license plate is installed.

In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shape, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they are.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

283

WARNING

■ Objects which may not be properly detected

The shape of the object may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following objects:

● Wires, fences, ropes, etc.

● Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves

● Sharply-angled objects

● Low objects

● Tall objects with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle

● People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.

● Moving objects such as people or animals

NOTICE

■ When using intuitive parking assist

In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction, etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

● The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a buzzer sounds when no objects are detected.

● If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact.

● If the bumper collides with something.

● If the display shows continuously without beeping, except when the buzzer volume is muted.

● If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.

If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.

■ Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

284

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Intelligent Clearance Sonar (ICS)



If a collision with an object may occur due to the vehicle suddenly moving forward due to an accidental accelerator pedal operation, the vehicle moving the unintended direction due to the wrong shift position being selected, or while parking or traveling at low speeds, the sensors detect objects, such as a wall, in the traveling direction of the vehicle, and the system operates to lessen an impact with an object and reduce the resulting damage.

Examples of system operation

The system will operate in situations such as the following if an object is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

◆ When traveling at a low speed and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is depressed late



: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

◆ When the accelerator pedal is depressed excessively

285

◆ When the vehicle moves in the unintended direction due to the wrong shift position being selected

286

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function

If a radar sensor detects a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle and a collision may occur, this function will perform brake control to reduce the likelihood of an impact with the approaching vehicle.

■ Examples of system operation

The system will operate in situations such as the following if an object is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

◆ When reversing, a vehicle is approaching and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is depressed late

Types of sensors

Front corner sensors

Front center sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

4-5. Using the driving support systems

287

Turning the Intelligent Clearance Sonar system on/off

Press / of the meter control switches, select .

Press trol switch.

of the meter con-

Select the “Yes” and push .

When the Intelligent Clearance Sonar is disabled, the ICS OFF indicator illuminates.

To re-enable the system when it was disabled, select on the multi-information display, select and then “On”. If disabled using this method, the system will not be re-enabled by turning the engine switch off and then to

IGNITION ON mode.

288

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Displays and buzzers for engine output restriction control and brake control

If the engine output restriction control or brake control operates, a buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver.

Depending on the situation, engine output restriction control will operate to either limit acceleration or restrict output as much as possible.

Control Situation

Multi-information display

ICS OFF

Indicator

Buzzer

Engine output restriction control is operating

(acceleration restriction)

Engine output restriction control is operating

(output restricted as much as possible)

Brake control is operating

Acceleration greater than a certain amount is not possible.

Stronger-thannormal brake operation is necessary.

Emergency braking is necessary.

“Object Detected

Acceleration

Reduced”

“Brake!”

Not illuminated



Short beep

Vehicle stopped by system operation

The vehicle has been stopped by brake control operation.

If the accelerator pedal is depressed:

“Switch to

Brake”

If the accelerator pedal is not depressed:

“Brake”

Illuminated

4-5. Using the driving support systems

289

Intelligent Clearance Sonar function

If the Intelligent Clearance Sonar function detects that a collision with an object is possible, the engine output will be restricted to restrain any increase in the vehicle speed. (Engine output restriction control:

See A below.)

Additionally, if the accelerator pedal continues to be depressed, the brakes will be applied automatically to reduce the vehicle speed.

(Brake control: See B below.)

290

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Off

Time

Off

Time

Off

Time

Accelerator pedal

Brake pedal

Engine output

Braking force

Down

Start of control

High possibility of a collision

Extremely high possibility of a collision

4-5. Using the driving support systems

291

■ The Intelligent Clearance Sonar function will operate when

The function will operate when the ICS OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing ( 

P. 287, 295) and all of the following conditions are met:

● Engine output restriction control

• The Intelligent Clearance Sonar system is enabled.

• The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or less.

• There is an object in the traveling direction of the vehicle and 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away.

• The system determines that a stronger-than-normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision.

● Brake control

• Engine output restriction control is operating.

• The system determines that an emergency brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision.

■ The Intelligent Clearance Sonar function will stop operating when

The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met:

● Engine output restriction control

• The Intelligent Clearance Sonar system is disabled.

• The collision becomes avoidable with normal brake operation.

• The object is no longer 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

● Brake control

• The Intelligent Clearance Sonar system is disabled.

• Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the vehicle is stopped by brake control.

• The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control.

• The object is no longer 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

■ Detection range of the Intelligent Clearance Sonar function

The detection range of the Intelligent Clearance Sonar function differs from the detection range of the intuitive parking assist. (

 P. 279)

Therefore, even if the intuitive parking assist detects an object and provides a warning, the Intelligent Clearance Sonar function may not start operating.

■ If the Intelligent Clearance Sonar function has operated

If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of the Intelligent Clearance Sonar function, the Intelligent Clearance Sonar system will be disabled and the ICS

OFF indicator will illuminate.

292

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Re-enabling the Intelligent Clearance Sonar system

To re-enable the Intelligent Clearance Sonar system when it is disabled due to operation of the Intelligent Clearance Sonar function, either enable the system again ( 

P. 287), or turn the engine switch off and then back to IGNITION

ON mode.

Additionally, if the object becomes no longer in the traveling direction of the vehicle or if the traveling direction of the vehicle changes (such as changing from moving forward to backing up, or from backing up to moving forward), the system will be re-enabled automatically.

■ Objects that the Intelligent Clearance Sonar function may not detect

The sensors may not be able to detect certain objects, such as the following.

● Cotton cloth, snow, and other materials that are poor reflectors of ultrasonic waves.

(People may also not be detected depending on the type of clothing they are wearing.)

● Objects which are not perpendicular to the ground, are not perpendicular to the traveling direction of the vehicle, are uneven or are waving.

● Low objects

● Thin objects such as wires, fences, ropes and signposts

● Objects that are extremely close to the bumper

■ Situations in which the Intelligent Clearance Sonar may not operate properly

When the shift lever is in N

■ Intuitive parking assist buzzer

Regardless of whether the intuitive parking assist system is enabled or not

( 

P. 276), if the Intelligent Clearance Sonar system is enabled (



P. 287),

the front or rear sensors detect an object and brake control is performed, the intuitive parking assist buzzer will sound to notify the driver of the approximate distance to the object.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

293

■ Situations in which the Intelligent Clearance Sonar function may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

In some situations such as the following, the Intelligent Clearance Sonar function may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.

● Vehicle surroundings

• When driving on a narrow road

• When driving on a gravel road or in an area with tall grass

• When driving toward a banner, flag, low-hanging branch or boom barrier

(such as those used at railroad crossings, toll gates and parking lots).

• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge

• When parallel parking

• When there is a rut or hole in the surface of the road

• When driving on a metal cover (grating), such as those used for drainage ditches

• When driving on a steep slope

• If a sensor is hit by a large amount of water, such as when driving on a flooded road

● Weather

• If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the system will return to normal)

• If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor

• When driving in inclement weather such as fog, snow or a sandstorm

● Other ultrasonic waves sources

• When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, the clearance sonar of other vehicles or other devices which produce ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle

• If a sticker or an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate

(especially fluorescent type), fog lights, a fender pole or wireless antenna is installed near a sensor

294

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● Changes in the vehicle posture

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load

• If the orientation of a sensor has been changed due to a collision or other impact

■ If the Intelligent Clearance Sonar function operates unnecessarily such as at a railroad crossing

Even in the event that the Intelligent Clearance Sonar function operates unnecessarily, such as at a railroad crossing, brake control will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds, allowing you to proceed forward and leave the area, Brake control can also be canceled by depressing the brake pedal.

Depressing the accelerator pedal again will allow you to proceed forward and leave the area.

■ Situations in which the Intelligent Clearance Sonar Brake function may not operate properly

In some situations such as the following, this function may not operate properly.

● Weather

• When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold

• When strong winds are blowing

• If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the system will return to normal)

• If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor

• When driving in inclement weather such as fog, snow or a sandstorm

● Vehicle surroundings

• When an object that cannot be detected is between the vehicle and a detected object

• If an object such as a vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian cuts in front of the vehicle or runs out from the side of the vehicle.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

295

● Other ultrasonic waves sources

• When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, the clearance sonar of other vehicles or other devices which produce ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle

• If a sticker or an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate

(especially fluorescent type), fog lights, a fender pole or wireless antenna is installed near a sensor

● Changes in the vehicle posture

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load

• If the orientation of a sensor has been changed due to a collision or other impact

■ If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected

The system needs to be initialized.

To initialize the system, drive the vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds or more at a speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or more.

■ If “ICS Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display and the ICS OFF indicator is flashing

Initialization may not have been performed after a battery terminal was disconnected and reconnected. Initialize the system. (

 P. 295)

If this message continues to be displayed even after initialization, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■ If “ICS Unavailable” and “Parking Assist Unavailable Clean Parking

Assist Sensor” are displayed on the multi-information display and the

ICS OFF indicator is flashing

● A sensor may be covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. In this case, remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to return the system to normal. If this message is shown even after removing dirt from the sensor, or shown when the sensor was not dirty to begin with, have the vehicle inspected at your

Toyota dealer.

● A sensor may be frozen. Once the ice melts, the system will return to normal.

● Water may be continuously flowing over the sensor surface, such as in a heavy rain. When the system determines that it is normal, the system will return to normal.

296

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■ Limitations of the Intelligent Clearance Sonar system

Do not overly rely on the system, as doing so may lead to an accident.

● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive carefully, taking care to observe your surroundings. The Intelligent Clearance Sonar system is designed to provide support to lessen the severity of collisions.

However, it may not operate in some situations.

● The Intelligent Clearance Sonar system is not designed to stop the vehicle completely. Additionally, even if the system has stopped the vehicle, it is necessary to depress the brake pedal immediately as brake control will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds.

■ To ensure the Intelligent Clearance Sonar system can operate properly

Observe the following precautions regarding the sensors (

 P. 287). Failure

to do so may cause a sensor to not operate properly, and may cause an accident.

● Do not modify, disassemble or paint the sensors.

● Do not replace a sensor with a part other than a genuine part.

● Do not subject a sensor or its surrounding area to a strong impact.

● Do not damage the sensors, and always keep them clean.

Observe the following precautions regarding the radar sensors (

 P. 264).

Failure to do so may cause a radar sensor to not operate properly, and may cause an accident.

● Do not modify, disassemble or paint the sensors.

● Do not replace a radar sensor with a part other than a genuine part.

● Do not subject a radar sensor or its surrounding area to a strong impact.

● Do not damage the radar sensors, and always keep the radar sensors and their surrounding area on the bumper clean.

■ Handling the suspension

Do not modify the suspension, as changes to the height or inclination of the vehicle may prevent the sensors from detecting objects correctly or cause the system to not operate or operate unnecessarily.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

297

NOTICE

■ To prevent the system from malfunctioning

● If the area around a sensor is subjected to an impact, the system may not operate properly due to the sensor being misaligned. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● When using a high pressure washer to wash the vehicle, do not spray the sensors directly, as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.

● When using steam to clean the vehicle, do not direct steam too close to the sensors as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.

■ To prevent a radar sensor from malfunctioning

● If the area around a radar sensor is subjected to an impact, the system may not operate properly due to a sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● Observe the radar sensor handling precautions. (

 P. 264)

■ To prevent unnecessary operation of the Intelligent Clearance Sonar system

In the following situations, disable the Intelligent Clearance Sonar system as the system may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.

● When inspecting the vehicle using a chassis roller, chassis dynamo or free roller

● When loading the vehicle onto a boat, truck or other transport vessel

● If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed

● If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load

● When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow

● When using an automatic car wash

298

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function

If the Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function detects that a collision with an approaching vehicle is possible, the engine output will be restricted to restrain any increase in vehicle speed. (Engine output restriction control: See A below.)

Additionally, if the accelerator pedal continues to be depressed, the brakes will be applied automatically to reduce the vehicle speed.

(Brake control: See B below.)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

299

Off

Time

Off

Down

Time

Off

Down

Accelerator pedal

Brake pedal

Engine output

Braking force

Time

Start of control

High possibility of a collision

Extremely high possibility of a collision

300

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ The Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function will operate when

The function will operate when the ICS OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing ( 

P. 287, 295) and all of the following conditions are met:

● Engine output restriction control

• The Intelligent Clearance Sonar with Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake is enabled.

• The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or less.

• Vehicles which are approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)

• The shift lever is in R.

• The system determines that a stronger than normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with an approaching vehicle.

● Brake control

• Engine output restriction control is operating.

• The system determines that an emergency brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with an approaching vehicle.

■ The Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function will stop operating when

The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met:

● Engine output restriction control

• The Intelligent Clearance Sonar with Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake is disabled.

• The collision becomes avoidable with normal brake operation.

• A vehicle is no longer approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.

● Brake control

• The Intelligent Clearance Sonar with Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake is disabled.

• Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the vehicle is stopped by brake control.

• The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control.

• A vehicle is no longer approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.

■ Detection area of the Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function

The detection area of the Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function differs from the detection area of the RCTA function ( 

P. 269).

Therefore, even if the RCTA function detects a vehicle and provides an alert, the Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function may not start operating.

■ If the Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function has operated

If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of the Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function, the Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function will be disabled and the

ICS OFF indicator will illuminate.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

301

■ Re-enabling the Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function

To re-enable the Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function when it is disabled while it is operating, either enable the Intelligent Clearance Sonar system again (

 P. 287), or turn the engine switch off and then back to IGNITION ON

mode. When the function is disabled, the ICS OFF indicator will illuminate.

( 

P. 87)

If there is no longer a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle when backing up, or if the traveling direction of the vehicle changes (such as changing from backing up to moving forward), the system will be re-enabled automatically. When the function is re-enabled, the ICS

OFF indicator will turn off.

■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function will not detect a vehicle

The Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects.

● Vehicles approaching from directly behind

● Vehicles backing up in a parking space next to your vehicle

● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to obstructions

● Vehicles which suddenly accelerate or decelerate near your vehicle

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.

● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle

● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle

: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■ RCTA function buzzer

Regardless of whether the RCTA function is enabled or not ( 

P. 262), if the

Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function is enabled and brake control is performed, a buzzer will sound to notify the driver.

302

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Situations in which the system may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision

In some situations such as the following, the Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.

● When the parking space faces a street and vehicles are being driven on the street

● When a detected vehicle turns while approaching the vehicle

● When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle

● When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of the vehicle, is short

● When there are spinning objects near your vehicle such as the fan of an air conditioning unit

● When water is splashed or sprayed toward the rear bumper, such as from a sprinkler

4-5. Using the driving support systems

303

■ Situations in which the Rear Cross Traffic Auto Brake function may not operate properly

In some situations such as the following, this function may not operate properly.

● Objects and vehicles which the radar sensors are not designed to detect

• Stationary objects

• Vehicles which are moving away from your vehicle

• Pedestrians, motorcycles, bicycles, etc.

• Objects which are extremely close to a radar sensor

• Vehicles which are approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)

• Vehicles which are approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of more than approximately 15 mph (24 km/h)

: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

● Situations in which the radar sensors may not be able to detect an object

• When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold

• If the rear bumper is covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc.

• If heavy rain or water strikes the vehicle

• When the detection area of a radar sensor is obstructed by an adjacent vehicle

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted

• When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow

• If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load

• If a sticker or an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate

(especially fluorescent type), fog lights, a fender pole or wireless antenna is installed near a radar sensor

• If the orientation of a radar sensor has been changed due to a collision or other impact or removal and installation

• When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle

• When a vehicle is approaching at high speed

● Situations in which the radar sensor may not detect a vehicle

• When a vehicle approaches from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle while you are turning while backing up

• When turning while backing up

304

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• When backing out of a shallow angle parking spot

• Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to obstructions

• When backing up on a slope with a sharp change in grade

• When a vehicle turns into the detection area

■ Handling the radar sensors



P. 264

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving mode select switches

The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition.

 Vehicles without AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension System)

305

Normal mode

Use for normal driving.

While in Eco drive mode or Sport mode, press the “NORMAL” switch to change the driving mode to normal mode.

Eco drive mode

Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that involve frequent accelerating.

When the “ECO” switch is pressed, the “ECO MODE” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.

Sport mode

Use sport mode when increased acceleration response and precise handling is desired, for example, when driving on mountain roads.

When the “SPORT” switch is pressed, the “SPORT” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.

306

4-5. Using the driving support systems



Vehicles with AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension System)

1 Normal mode/Custom mode

• Normal mode

Use for normal driving.

While in Eco drive mode, Sport mode or Custom mode press the “NOR-

MAL/CUSTOM” switch to change the driving mode to normal mode.

• Custom mode

Allows you to drive with the following functions set to your preferred settings.

Custom mode settings can only be changed on the drive mode customization display of the audio system screen.

(Displaying the drive mode customization display: 

P. 498)

When the “NORMAL/CUSTOM” switch is pressed, the “CUSTOM” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

307

Function Setting

Powertrain

Chassis

Air conditioning system

Normal

Power

Eco

Normal

Sport

Normal

Eco

Eco drive mode

Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that involve frequent accelerating.

When the “ECO” switch is pressed, the “ECO MODE” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.

Sport mode

• SPORT S mode

Controls the transmission and engine to provide quick, powerful acceleration. This mode is suitable for when agile driving response is desired, such as when driving on roads with many curves.

When not in SPORT S mode, if the “SPORT S/S+” switch is pressed, the “SPORT S” indicator will come on in the multi-information display.

• SPORT S+ mode

Helps to ensure steering performance and driving stability by simultaneously controlling the steering and suspension in addition to the transmission and engine. Suitable for sportier driving.

When in SPORT S mode, if the “SPORT S/S+” switch is pressed, the

“SPORT S+” indicator will come on in the multi-information display.

308

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency (

 P. 322). To improve air

conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.

■ Automatic deactivation of sport mode and custom mode

If the engine switch is turned off after driving in sport mode or custom mode, the drive mode will be changed to normal mode.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving assist systems

309

To keep driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.

Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

◆ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

◆ Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.

◆ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)

Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.

Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling steering performance.

◆ TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

◆

Active Cornering Assist (ACA) (TRD package)

Helps to prevent the vehicle from sliding to the outer side by performing inner wheel brake control when attempting to accelerate while turning

◆ Hill-start assist control

Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when starting on an uphill

310

4-5. Using the driving support systems

◆ EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel

◆ Adaptive Variable Suspension System (if equipped)

By independently controlling the damping force of the shock absorbers for each of the 4 wheels according to the road and driving conditions, this system helps riding comfort with superior vehicle stability, and helps good vehicle posture ( 

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

◆ The Secondary Collision Brake

When the SRS airbag sensor detects a collision and the system operates, the brakes and stop lights are automatically controlled to reduce the vehicle speed and help reduce the possibility of further damage due to a secondary collision.

When the TRAC/VSC systems are operating

The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC systems are operating.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

311

Disabling the TRAC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release .

“Traction Control Turned Off” will be shown on the multi-information display.

Press again to turn the system back on.

312

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems

To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the “Traction Control Turned

Off” will be shown on the multi-information display

Press again to turn the system back on.

: Pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking will also be disabled.

The PCS warning light will come on and the message will be shown on the multi-information display. (

 P. 237)

■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that TRAC has been disabled even if has not been pressed

TRAC is temporary deactivated. If the information continues to show, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Operating conditions of hill-start assist control

When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate:

● The shift lever is in a position other than P or N (when starting off forward/ backward on an upward incline)

● The vehicle is stopped

● The accelerator pedal is not depressed

● The parking brake is not engaged

■ Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control

The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:

● The shift lever is shifted to P or N

● The accelerator pedal is depressed

● The parking brake is engaged

● 2 seconds at maximum elapsed after the brake pedal is released

4-5. Using the driving support systems

313

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC and hill-start assist control systems

● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard also after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

■ EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Active Cornering Assist operation sounds and vibrations

When the Active Cornering Assist is operated, operation sounds and vibrations may be generated from the brake system, but this is not a malfunction.

■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems

After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically re-enabled in the following situations:

● When the engine switch is turned off

● If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed increases

If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur when vehicle speed increases.

■ Operating conditions of Active Cornering Assist

The system operates when the following occurs.

● TRAC/VSC can operate

● The driver is attempting to accelerate while turning

● The system detects that the vehicle is sliding to the outer side

● The brake pedal is released

■ Secondary Collision Brake operating conditions

The system operates when the SRS airbag sensor detects a collision while the vehicle is in motion.

However, the system does not operate in any of the following situations.

● The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h)

● Components are damaged

314

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Secondary Collision Brake automatic cancellation

The system is automatically canceled in any of the following situations.

● The vehicle speed drops below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

● A certain amount of time elapses during operation

● The accelerator pedal is depressed a large amount

■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result.

Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.

WARNING

■ The ABS does not operate effectively when

● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).

● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:

● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

● When driving with tire chains

● When driving over bumps in the road

● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces

■ TRAC/VSC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC/VSC system is operating.

Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

■ Active Cornering Assist does not operate effectively when

● Do not overly rely on Active Cornering Assist. Active Cornering Assist may not operate effectively when accelerating down slopes or driving on slippery road surfaces.

● When Active Cornering Assist frequently operates, Active Cornering

Assist may temporarily stop operating to:

• Ensure proper operation of the brakes, TRAC and VSC.

• Prevent the brakes from overheating.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

315

WARNING

■ Hill- start assist control does not operate effectively when

● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.

● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.

■ When the TRAC/VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.

■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■ Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

■ Secondary Collision Brake

Do not rely solely upon the Secondary Collision Brake. This system is designed to help reduce the possibility of further damage due to a secondary collision, however, that effect changes according to various conditions.

Overly relying on the system may result in death or serious injury.

316

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

Preparation for winter

● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

• Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid

● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.

● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

: Tire chains cannot be mounted on vehicles with 18 and 19-inch tires.

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions:

● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.

Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.

● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.

● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.

4-6. Driving tips

317

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle

● Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the wheels.

Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.

● If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P * .

: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any other position without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be shifted from P, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Selecting tire chains

 Vehicles with 17-inch tires

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain:

0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter

0.39 in. (10 mm) in width

1.18 in. (30 mm) in length

Cross chain:

0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter

0.55 in. (14 mm) in width

0.98 in. (25 mm) in length

 Vehicles with 18 and 19-inch tires

Tire chains cannot be mounted.

Snow tires should be used instead.

318

4-6. Driving tips

Regulations on the use of tire chains

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

■ Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:

● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

● Install tire chains on the front tires. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.

● Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4  1/2 mile (0.5  1.0 km).

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

WARNING

■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

● Use tires of the size specified.

● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.

● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

■ Driving with tire chains (vehicles with 17-inch tires)

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

● Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system.

4-6. Driving tips

319

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters.

■ Fitting tire chains (vehicles with 17-inch tires)

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

320

4-6. Driving tips

321

Interior features

Automatic air conditioning system............................. 322

Heated steering wheel/ seat heaters/ seat ventilators................ 329

5-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list ................ 332

• Interior light ................... 333

• Personal lights .............. 333

• Ambient lights ............... 334

5-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features ..... 335

• Glove box...................... 336

• Console box.................. 336

• Bottle holders................ 337

• Cup holders .................. 338

• Auxiliary boxes.............. 339

• Open tray ...................... 340

Trunk features ................... 341

5-4. Other interior features

Other interior features ....... 342

• Sun visors ..................... 342

• Vanity mirrors................ 342

• Power outlet.................. 343

• USB charging ports....... 344

• Wireless charger........... 346

• Armrest ......................... 355

• Assist grips ................... 355

• Coat hooks.................... 356

Garage door opener.......... 357

322

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Air conditioning controls

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

To adjust the temperature setting, press “ ” on (driver’s side) to increase the temperature and press “ ” on

(driver’s side) to decrease the temperature.

If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air.

The air conditioning system switches between individual and synchronized modes each time is pressed.

Synchronized mode (indicator on):

The driver’s side can be used to adjust the temperature for the driver’s and front passenger’s side. To enter individual mode, operate the front passenger’s side .

Individual mode (indicator off):

The temperature for the driver’s and front passenger’s side can be adjusted separately.

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Fan speed setting

To adjust the fan speed, press

323

to increase the fan speed and to decrease the fan speed.

Press to turn the fan off.

■ Change the airflow mode

To change the airflow mode, press .

The air outlets used are switched each time the button is pressed.

Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and feet.

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

Using automatic mode

Press .

The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Adjust the temperature setting.

To stop the operation, press .

■ Automatic mode indicator

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained.

324

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Other functions

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.

■ Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.

Press .

The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases.

Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.

■

To return to the previous mode, press again when the windshield is defogged.

Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Press .

The defoggers will automatically turn off after a period of time.

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Air outlets

■ Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume change according to the selected airflow mode.

325

■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

 Front  Rear

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

326

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after is pressed.

■ Fogging up of the windows

● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.

Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.

● If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.

● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

■ When driving on dusty roads

Close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake mode be set to outside air mode and the fan speed to any setting except off.

■ Outside/recirculated air mode

● Setting to the recirculated air mode temporarily is recommended in preventing dirty air from entering the vehicle interior and helping to cool the vehicle when the outside air temperature is high.

● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning system is on

● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.

● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

■ When the outside temperature is low

The dehumidification function may not operate even when

is pressed.

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

327

■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

● In the Eco drive mode, “ECO” is displayed on the air conditioning screen and the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency:

• Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/ cooling capacity

• Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected

● To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:

• Adjust the fan speed

• Turn off Eco drive mode

■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors

● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.

● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.

● To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.

■ Air conditioning filter



P. 412

■ Customization

Some functions can be customized. (

 P. 503)

328

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

WARNING

■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

● Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.

The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

● Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover the air outlets.

Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defogging.

■ To prevent burns

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Heated steering wheel



ventilators



/seat heaters/seat

329

Heated steering wheel and seat heaters heat the side grips of the steering wheel and seats, respectively. Seat ventilators maintain good ventilation by pulling air through the seat upholstery.

WARNING

● Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with the steering wheel and seats when the heater is on:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

● Observe the following precautions to prevent minor burns or overheating:

• Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater.

• Do not use seat heater more than necessary.

NOTICE

● Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

● To prevent battery discharge, do not use the functions when the engine is off.



: If equipped

330

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Heated steering wheel

Turns the heated steering wheel on/off

The indicator light comes on when the heated steering wheel is operating.

The heated steering wheel can be used when the engine switch is in IGNI-

TION ON mode.

Seat heaters

■ Front

 Without seat ventilators  With seat ventilators

Each time the switch is pressed, the operation condition changes as follows.

Hi (3 segments lit)  Mid (2 segments lit)  Lo (1 segment lit)  Off

The level indicator lights up during operation.

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Rear (if equipped)

Turns the heated rear seat on/off

The indicator light will illuminate when the rear seat heater is operating.

331

The seat heaters can be used when the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

Seat ventilators

Each time the switch is pressed, the operation condition changes as follows.

Hi (3 segments lit)  Mid (2 segments lit)  Lo (1 segment lit) 

Off

The level indicator lights up during operation.

■ The seat ventilators can be used when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ Air conditioning system-linked control mode

When a seat ventilator is set to Hi, the fan speed of the seat ventilator may increase according to the fan speed of the air conditioning system

332

5-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Front interior/personal lights (

 P. 333)

Shift lever light

Ambient lights (if equipped) ( 

P. 334)

Door courtesy lights

Rear personal lights (

 P. 333)

Footwell lights

Front center console light

5-2. Using the interior lights

Interior light

The rear personal lights turn on/off together with the interior light.

Turns the lights on/off linked to door positions

Turns the lights on/off

333

Personal lights

■ Front

Turns the lights on/off

■ Rear

Turns the lights on/off

334

5-2. Using the interior lights

Ambient lights (if equipped)

Each time the “MOOD” switch is pressed, the brightness level changes.

● Illuminated entry system:

The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.

● If the interior lights remain on when the engine switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

● If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) or in the event of a strong rear impact, the interior lights will turn on automatically.

The interior lights will turn off automatically after approximately 20 minutes.

The interior lights can be turned off manually. However, in order to help prevent further collisions, it is recommended that they be left on until safety can be ensured.

(The interior lights may not turn on automatically depending on the force of the impact and conditions of the collision.)

● Some functions can be customized. (

 P. 504)

5-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features

335

Auxiliary boxes

Glove box

( 

P. 339)

( 

P. 336)

Bottle holders/door pockets

( 

P. 337)

Cup holders

Console box

(

 P. 338)

(

 P. 336)

Auxiliary box/open tray

(

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior.......... 366

P. 339, 340)

WARNING

● Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

• Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.

• Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

● When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use, keep the lids closed.

In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.

336

5-3. Using the storage features

Glove box

Push the button to open the glove box.

The glove box light turns on when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or

IGNITION ON mode.

Console box

Push the knob.

■ Console box tray

The tray can be removed.

■ Console box light

The console box light turns on when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or

IGNITION ON mode.

Bottle holders

 Front

5-3. Using the storage features

 Rear

337

● When storing a bottle, close the cap.

● The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.

WARNING

Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.

NOTICE

Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glass or paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glass cups may break.

338

5-3. Using the storage features

Cup holders

 Front  Rear

Pull the armrest down.

WARNING

● Do not place any objects that fit loosely or are very tall in the cup holders, otherwise they may fall out while driving, possibly leading to an accident.

● To prevent burns, cover hot drinks when placed in the cup holders.

Auxiliary boxes

 Type A (if equipped)

5-3. Using the storage features

 Type B

339

Push the lid.

 Type C

Pull the armrest down.

Opening:

Push the tray forward until it locks.

Closing:

Push the tray forward to release the lock and the tray will automatically close.

■ When small items are placed on top of the tray (type C)

The tray can be opened while small items are placed on it.

340

5-3. Using the storage features

■ When using wireless charger (if equipped)



P. 346

WARNING

■ Items unsuitable for storing (type A)

Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).

Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall out, resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

■ When opening or closing the tray (type C)

● To prevent damaging small items, when opening the tray while small items are placed on it, make sure the items will not get caught.

● To prevent damaging the tray, do not pull the tray to close it. Doing so may damage the tray.

● When on a steep downward incline, the tray may be slow to close automatically. In this case, the tray can be pulled closed after pushing it to release the lock.

Open tray

WARNING

Do not store items in the tray that can easily shift or roll out.

Failure to do so may cause items to be thrown out of the tray in the event of sudden braking or steering. In these cases, the items may interfere with pedal operation or cause driver distraction, resulting in an accident.

Trunk features

Grocery bag hooks

5-3. Using the storage features

341

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hooks, do not apply too much load to the hooks.

Cargo net

342

5-4. Other interior features

Other interior features

Sun visors

To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.

To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.

To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it backward.

Vanity mirrors

Open the cover to use.

The light turns on when the cover is opened.

If the vanity lights remain on for 20 minutes while the engine is off, the lights will turn off automatically.

5-4. Other interior features

343

Power outlet

Please use as a power supply for electronic goods that use less than

12 VDC/10 A (power consumption of 120 W).

Open the lid.

■ The power outlet can be used when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

■ When turning the engine switch off

Disconnect electrical devices with charging functions, such as mobile battery packs.

If such devices are left connected, the engine switch may not be turned off normally.

NOTICE

● To avoid damaging the power outlet, close the power outlet lid when it is not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.

● To prevent battery discharge, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

344

5-4. Other interior features

USB charging ports

The USB charging ports are used to supply 2.1 A of electricity at 5 V to external devices (power consumption of 10.5 W).

The USB charging ports are for charging only. They are not designed for data transfer or other purposes.

Depending on the external device, it may not charge properly. Refer to the manual included with the device before using a USB charging port.

■ Using the USB charging ports

 Front  Rear

Open the console box lid and open the lid.

Open the lid.

■ The USB charging ports can be used when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

■ Situations in which the USB charging ports may not operate correctly

● If a device which consumes more than 2.1 A at 5 V (10.5 W) is connected

● If a device designed to communicate with a personal computer, such as a

USB memory device, is connected

● If the connected external device is turned off (depending on device)

● If the temperature inside the vehicle is high, such as after the vehicle has been parked in the sun

■ About connected external devices

Depending on the connected external device, charging may occasionally be suspended and then start again. This is not a malfunction.

5-4. Other interior features

■ Cable pass through

● The cutouts on the console box rim allow power cables to be passed through when the console box lid is closed.

345

● An electronic device on the console box tray can be recharged by running power cables through the clearance of the tray and connecting it to the USB charging ports underneath the tray.

To prevent damage to the charging port of an electronic device when it is placed on the tray while it is being charged, place the connector side of the device on the raised portions near the cutout.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the USB charging ports

● Do not insert foreign objects into the ports.

● Do not spill water or other liquids into the ports.

● When the USB charging ports are not in use, close the lids. If a foreign object or liquid enters a port may cause a short circuit.

● Do not apply excessive force to or impact the USB charging ports.

● Do not disassemble or modify the USB charging ports.

■ To prevent damage to external devices

● Do not leave external devices in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to an external device.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary force to an external device or the cable of an external device while it is connected.

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the USB charging ports for a long period of time with the engine stopped.

346

5-4. Other interior features

Wireless charger (if equipped)

A portable device, such as a smartphone or mobile battery, can be charged by just placing it on the charging area, provided the device is compatible with the Qi wireless charging standard created by the

Wireless Power Consortium.

The wireless charger cannot be used with a portable device that is larger than the charging area. Additionally, depending on the portable device, the wireless charger may not operate properly. Refer to the operation manual of the portable device.

■ The “Qi” symbol

The “Qi” symbol is a trademark of the Wireless Power Consortium.

■ Name for all parts

Power supply switch

Operation indicator light

Charge area

5-4. Other interior features

347

■ Using the wireless charger

Push the open tray forward until it locks. ( 

P. 339)

Press the power supply switch of the wireless charger.

Pressing the switch again turns the wireless charger off.

When turned on, the operation indicator light (green) comes on.

When the engine switch is turned off, the on/off state of the wireless charger will be memorized.

Place a portable device on the charging area with its charging surface facing down.

While charging, the operation indicator light (orange) will be illuminated.

If charging does not begin, move the portable device as close to the center of the charging area as possible.

When charging is complete, the operation indicator light (green) will illuminate.

● Recharging function

• If a certain amount of time has elapsed since charging completed and the portable device has not been moved, the wireless charger will restart charging.

• If the portable device is moved within the charging area, charging will stop temporarily then restart.

348

5-4. Other interior features

■ Operation indicator light status

Off

Operation indicator light

Green (illuminated)

Orange (illuminated)

State

The Wireless charger is off

Standby (charging is possible)

Charging is complete

A portable device has been placed on the charging area (identifying the portable device)

Charging in progress

: Depending on the portable device, the operation indicator light may stay illuminated (orange) after charging has completed.

● If the operation indicator light blinks

If an error is detected, the operation indicator light will blink

(orange). Take the appropriate measures according to the table below.

Operation indicator light

Blinks (orange) at a one second interval continuously

Suspected causes

Vehicle to charger communication failure.

Blinks (orange) 3 times repeatedly

A foreign object exists between the portable device and charging area.

Portable device is not positioned properly on the charging area.

Blinks (orange) 4 times repeatedly

The temperature of the wireless charger is excessively high.

Measure

Contact your Toyota dealer.

Remove the foreign object.

Move the portable device toward the center of the charging area.

Stop charging immediately and continue charging after a while.

5-4. Other interior features

349

■ The wireless charger can be operated when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

■ Portable devices that can be charged

● Portable devices compatible with the Qi wireless charging standard can be charged by the wireless charger. However, compatibility with all devices which meet the Qi wireless charging standard is not guaranteed.

● The wireless charger is designed to supply low power electricity (5 W or less) to a cellular phone, smartphone, or other portable device.

■ If a cover or accessory is attached to the portable device

Do not charge a portable device if a cover or accessory which is not Qi compatible is attached. Depending on the type of cover and/or accessory attached, it may not be possible to charge the portable device. If the portable device is placed on the charging area and does not charge, remove the cover and/or accessories.

■ If interference is heard in AM radio broadcasts while charging

Turn off the wireless charger and check if the noise is reduced. If noise is reduced, press and hold the power supply switch of the wireless charger for 2 seconds. The frequency of the wireless charger is changed and noise may be reduced. When the frequency is changed, the operation indicator light will blink (orange) 2 times.

■ Charging precautions

● If the electronic key cannot be detected in the cabin, charging cannot be performed. When a door is opened and closed, charging may be temporarily suspended.

● While charging, the wireless charger and the portable device will become warm. This is not a malfunction.

If a portable device becomes warm while charging and charging stops due to the protection function of the portable device, wait until the portable device cools down and charge it again.

■ Sound generated during operation

When the power supply switch is turned on or while a portable device is being identified, operation sounds may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

■ Cleaning the wireless charger



P. 370

350

5-4. Other interior features

■ Certification for the wireless charger

5-4. Other interior features

351

352

5-4. Other interior features

353

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

When charging a portable device while driving, for safety reasons, the driver should not operate the portable device.

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators, as well as any other electrical medical device, should consult their physician about the usage of the wireless charger.

Operations of the wireless charger may have an affect on medical devices.

■ To prevent damage or burns

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in the possibility of fire, equipment failure or damage, or burns due to heat.

● Do not put any metallic objects between the charging area and the portable device while charging.

● Do not attach metallic objects, such as aluminum stickers, to the charging area.

● Do not cover the wireless charger with a cloth or other object while charging.

● Do not attempt to charge portable devices which are not compatible with the Qi wireless charging standard.

● Do not disassemble, modify or remove the wireless charger.

● Do not apply force or impact to the wireless charger.

354

5-4. Other interior features

NOTICE

■ Conditions in which the wireless charger may not operate correctly

In the following situations, the wireless charger may not operate correctly:

● When a portable device is fully charged

● When there is a foreign object between the charging area and portable device

● When a portable device becomes hot while charging

● When a portable device is placed on the wireless area with its charging surface facing up

● When a portable device is not centered on the charging area

● When the vehicle is near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

● When the portable device is in contact with, or is covered by any of the following metallic objects:

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached

• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside

• Metallic wallets or bags

• Coins

• Metal hand warmers

• Media such as CDs and DVDs

● When wireless keys (that emit radio waves) other than those of your vehicle are being used nearby.

If in situations other than above the wireless charger does not operate properly or the operation indicator light is blinking, the wireless charger may be malfunctioning. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■ To prevent failure or damage to data

● Do not bring magnetic cards, such as a credit card, or magnetic recording media, close to the wireless charger while charging. Otherwise, data may be erased due to the influence of magnetism.

Additionally, do not bring precision instruments such as wrist watches, close to the wireless charger, as such objects may malfunction.

● Do not leave portable devices in the cabin. The temperature inside the cabin may become high when parked in the sun, and cause damage to the device.

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the wireless charger for a long period of time with the engine stopped.

Armrest

Fold down the armrest for use.

5-4. Other interior features

355

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest, do not apply too much load on the armrest.

Assist grips

An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.

WARNING

Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the assist grip, do not put a heavy load on the assist grip.

356

5-4. Other interior features

Coat hooks

Coat hooks are provided on the rear assist grips.

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the

SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.

5-4. Other interior features

357

Garage door opener



The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.

HomeLink ®

The HomeLink ® wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming methods on the following pages to determine the method which is appropriate for the device.

HomeLink

indicator light

Garage door operation indicators

HomeLink

icon

Illuminates while HomeLink

® operating.

Buttons

■ Before programming the HomeLink

● During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other potential harm.

● It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control transmitter for more accurate programming.

● Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the

“Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor.



: If equipped

358

5-4. Other interior features

■ Programming the HomeLink ®

Steps

through

must be performed within 60 seconds, otherwise the indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not

1 be able to be completed.

Press and release the HomeLink ® button you want to program and check that the HomeLink

indicator light flashes orange.

Point the remote control transmitter for the device at the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in.

(25 to 75 mm) from the

HomeLink ® buttons.

Keep the HomeLink

indicator light in view while programming.

Program a device.

 Programming a device other than an entry gate (for U.S.A.

owners)

Press and hold the remote control transmitter button until the

HomeLink ® indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green

(fixed code), then release the button.



Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device in the Canadian market

Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink ® indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green

(rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code).

5-4. Other interior features

359

Test the HomeLink ® operation by pressing the newly programmed button and observing the indicator light:

● Indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device has completed. The garage door or other device should operate when a HomeLink ® button is pressed and released.

● Indicator light flashes rapidly: The garage door opener motor or other device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete programming, firmly press and hold the HomeLink ® button for 2 seconds then release it.

● If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed to

“Programming a rolling code system”.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining HomeLink ® buttons.

■ Programming a rolling code system

2 or more people may be necessary to complete rolling code programming.

Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor in the garage.

This button can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

Refer to the Owner’s manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for details.

Press and release the

“Learn” or “Smart” button.

Perform

within 30 seconds after performing

360

5-4. Other interior features

Press and hold the desired

HomeLink

button (inside the vehicle) for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this sequence (press/hold/ release) up to 3 times to complete programming.

If the garage door opener motor operates when the

HomeLink ® button is pressed, the garage door opener motor recognizes the

HomeLink

signal.

■ Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only available for compatible devices)

When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the status of the opening and closing of a garage door through indicators in your vehicle.

2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.HomeLink.com.)

Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to

HomeLink

, both garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly green and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.

If the indicators do not flash, perform presses of the HomeLink ®

and

within the first 10

button after programming has been completed.

Press a programmed HomeLink ® button to operate a garage door.

Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink ® button, after the garage door operation has stopped, press the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will flash rapidly green and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.

5-4. Other interior features

361

■ Reprogramming a single HomeLink ® button

When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have devices registered to them can be overwritten:

With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink ® button.

When the HomeLink to hold the HomeLink

HomeLink ®

indicator starts flashing orange, continue

® button and perform “Programming the

” (it takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink ® indicator to start flashing).

Operating the HomeLink ®

Press the appropriate HomeLink ® button. The HomeLink ® indicator light should turn on.

Garage door operation indicators

The status of the opening and closing of a garage door is shown by the indicators.

Opening

Closing

This function is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.HomeLink.com.)

Color

Orange (flashing)

Green

Red (flashing)

Status

Currently opening/closing

Opening/closing has completed

Feedback signals cannot be received

The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage door and the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals from the garage door may not be received. To recall the previous door operation status, press and release either HomeLink ® buttons and or and simultaneously.

The last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.

362

5-4. Other interior features

Erasing the entire HomeLink ® memory (all three codes)

Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the

HomeLink ® indicator light changes from continuously lit orange to rapidly flashing green.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the

HomeLink

memory.

■ Codes stored in the HomeLink

memory

● The registered codes are not erased even if the battery cable is disconnected.

● If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink

button that already has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not be erased.

■ Before programming

● Install a new battery in the transmitter.

● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the Home-

Link

■ Certification for the garage door opener

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

5-4. Other interior features

363

■ When support is necessary

Visit on the web at www.homelink.com/toyota or call 1-800-355-3515.

WARNING

■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.

■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink

compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

■ When operating or programming HomeLink

Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink

buttons.

364

5-4. Other interior features

365

Maintenance and care

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior........... 369

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements................... 372

General maintenance........ 374

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs......................... 378

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions ..................... 379

Hood ................................. 381

Positioning a floor jack ...... 382

Engine compartment......... 383

Tires .................................. 393

Tire inflation pressure ....... 407

Wheels .............................. 410

Air conditioning filter.......... 412

Electronic key battery........ 414

Checking and replacing fuses ............................... 416

Light bulbs......................... 419

366

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.

● Wipe away any water.

● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes

● Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.

● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle's paint.

● Vehicles with a rear spoiler: In certain automatic car washes, the rear spoiler may interfere with machine operation. This may prevent the vehicle from being cleaned properly or result in damage to the rear spoiler.

■ High pressure car washes

As water may enter the cabin, do not bring the nozzle tip near the gaps around the doors or perimeter of the windows, or spray these areas continuously.

6-1. Maintenance and care

367

■ When using a car wash

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

● Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (

 P. 137)

■ Aluminum wheels

● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent.

● Wash detergent off with water immediately after use.

● To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following precautions.

• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent

• Do not use hard brushes

• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather

■ Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

■ Plated portions

If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as follows:

● Use a soft cloth dampened with an approximately 5% solution of neutral detergent and water to clean the dirt off.

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.

● To remove oily deposits, use alcohol wet wipes or a similar product.

WARNING

■ When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components, etc. to catch fire.

■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.

■ Precaution regarding the rear bumper with Blind Spot Monitor

If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If this occurs, avoid using the system and consult your Toyota dealer.

368

6-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE

■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels, etc.)

● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface

• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights

● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■ When using a high pressure car wash

Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water.

• Traction related parts

• Steering parts

• Suspension parts

• Brake parts.

● Keep the cleaning nozzle at least 11.9 in. (30 cm) away from the vehicle body. Otherwise resin section, such as moldings and bumpers, may be deformed and damaged. Also, do not continuously hold the nozzle in the same place.

● Do not spray the lower part of the windshield continuously. If water enters the air conditioning system intake located near the lower part of the windshield, the air conditioning system may not operate correctly.

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

369

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior

● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

● If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

Cleaning the areas with satin-finish metal accents

● Remove dirt using a soft cloth or synthetic chamois dampened in a baking soda (sodium bicarbonate) solution.

Use a solution of approximately 9% baking soda dissolved in water.

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.

Cleaning the leather areas

● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

● Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

370

6-1. Maintenance and care

■ Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.

■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water.

Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

■ Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

WARNING

■ Water in the vehicle

● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause electrical components, etc., to malfunction or catch fire.

● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

( 

P. 38)

An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Vehicles with wireless charger:

Do not let the wireless charger ( 

P. 346) get wet. Failure to do so may

cause the charger to become hot and cause burns or could cause electric shock resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

6-1. Maintenance and care

371

NOTICE

■ Cleaning detergents

● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:

• Areas other than the seats and steering wheel: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach

• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol

• Steering wheel: Organic substances, such as thinner, and cleaner that contains alcohol

● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.

■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces:

● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.

● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

■ Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield

Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.

( 

P. 220)

■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window

● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.

● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

372

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance:

General maintenance

General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.

Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

6-2. Maintenance

373

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

■ Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required

After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the message.

To reset the message, perform the following procedure:

Select on the multi-information display using the meter control switches on the steering wheel. ( 

Select and then press and hold .

Select “Scheduled Maintenance” and then press

Select “Yes” and then press .

A message will be displayed on the multi-information display when the reset procedure has been completed.

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer

● Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.

● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.

WARNING

■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury.

■ Important health and safety information

● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. ( 

P. 390)

374

6-2. Maintenance

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner’s Warranty

Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment

Items

Battery

Brake fluid

Engine coolant

Engine oil

Exhaust system

Radiator/condenser

Washer fluid

Check points

Check the connections. ( 

P. 390)

Is the brake fluid at the correct level? ( 

P. 389)

Is the engine coolant at the correct level? ( 

P. 387)

Is the engine oil at the correct level?

( 

P. 384)

There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.

The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects.

( 

P. 388)

Is there sufficient washer fluid?

( 

P. 392)

6-2. Maintenance

375

Vehicle interior

Lights

Parking brake

Items

Accelerator pedal

Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism

Brake pedal

Brakes

Head restraints (adjustable type)

Indicators/buzzers

Check points

• The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).

• When parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?

• Does the brake pedal move smoothly?

• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?

( 

P. 478)

• Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play?

( 

P. 478)

• The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.

• The brakes should work effectively.

• The brake pedal should not feel spongy.

• The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.

• Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?

• Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?

• Do all the lights come on?

• Does the parking brake operate normally?

• When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?

376

6-2. Maintenance

Items

Seat belts

Seats

Steering wheel

Vehicle exterior

Items

Doors/trunk

Engine hood

Fluid leaks

Tires

Windshield wipers

Check points

• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?

• The seat belts should not be damaged.

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?

• Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play?

• There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel.

Check points

• Do the doors/trunk operate smoothly?

• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?

• There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.

• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?

• The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn.

• Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?

• The wheel nuts should not be loose.

• The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation.

• The wiper blades should clear the windshield without streaking or skipping.

6-2. Maintenance

377

WARNING

■ If the engine is running

Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

378

6-2. Maintenance

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:

● When the battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.

Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.

● When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

379

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.

Items

Battery condition

(

Brake fluid level

(

Engine level (

coolant

Engine oil level

(

 P. 384)

• Warm water

Parts and tools

• Baking soda • Grease

• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)

• SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology

U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with

50% coolant and 50% deionized water.

Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with

55% coolant and 45% deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for adding engine coolant)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

Fuses ( 

P. 416)

• Fuse with same amperage rating as original

Radiator/condenser (

 P. 388)

Tire pressure

(

 P. 407)

inflation

• Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air source



Washer fluid

(

 P. 392)

• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

380

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions.

■ When working on the engine compartment

● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille

Be sure the engine switch is off. With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. ( 

P. 388)

■ Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

from getting in your eyes.

NOTICE

■ If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

381

Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

Pull the hood lock release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.

■ Open hood warning buzzer

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), the master warning light flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the hood is not fully closed.

WARNING

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

382

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Positioning a floor jack

When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the operation safely.

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

◆

Front

◆ Rear

Engine compartment

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

383

Fuse boxes (if equipped)

(

 P. 416)

Engine oil filler cap (

 P. 385)

Engine oil level dipstick

(

 P. 384)

Brake fluid reservoir

(

 P. 389)

Battery (

 P. 390)

Radiator

Electric cooling fan

(

 P. 388)

Condenser (

 P. 388)

Engine coolant reservoir

(

 P. 387)

Washer fluid tank (

 P. 392)

384

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Checking the engine oil

Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

Low

Normal

Excessive

The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

385

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Engine oil selection 

P. 475

Oil quantity

(Low  Full)

Items

1.9 qt. (1.8 L, 1.6 lmp. qt.)

Clean funnel

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

■ Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.

● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine

● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used

● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently

● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic

386

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

■ Used engine oil

● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.

Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■ When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

387

Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

“F” line

“L” line

If the level is on or below the “L” line, add coolant up to the “F” line.

( 

P. 466)

■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31  F [-35  C])

Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44  F [-42  C])

For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

388

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

■ When the engine is hot

Do not remove the engine coolant reservoir cap or the radiator cap.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

■ When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.

If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■ When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Brake fluid

■ Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank.

“MAX”

“MIN”

389

■ Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.

Fluid type

Item

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid

SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 brake fluid

Clean funnel

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

WARNING

■ When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

390

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Battery

Check the battery as follows.

■ Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

■ Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:

● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery

● Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.

● Start the engine with the engine switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine may not start with the engine switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from the second attempt.

● The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnecting the battery. Take extra care when connecting the battery if the engine switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.

If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota dealer.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

391

WARNING

■ Chemicals in the battery

Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the battery:

● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

● Keep children away from the battery.

■ Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.

■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

● If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

■ When disconnecting the battery

Do not disconnect the negative (-) terminal on the body side. The disconnected negative (-) terminal may touch the positive (+) terminal, which may cause a short and result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

392

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Washer fluid

Add washer fluid in the following situations:

● A washer does not work.

● “Windshield Washer Fluid Low” is displayed on the multi-information display.

WARNING

■ When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine, etc.

NOTICE

■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.

■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

393

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

Checking tires

Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread.

Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

New tread

Worn tread

Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “ etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire.

 ” mark,

Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.

Front

394

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire pressure warning system

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valve and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.

● The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning system can be displayed on the multi-information display.

● If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a screen display and a warning light.

( 

P. 434

)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

395

◆ Installing tire pressure warning valve and transmitters

When replacing the tires or wheels, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters must be installed to the wheels which will be installed to the vehicle.

When new tire pressure warning valve and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. (

 P. 396)

◆ Initializing the tire pressure warning system

■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances:

● When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weight.

● When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when the tire size is changed.

● When rotating the tires.

● After performing the transmitter ID code registration procedure.

( 

P. 396)

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch off.

The initialization procedure cannot be started while the vehicle is moving.

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (

 P. 478)

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

Start the engine. ( 

P. 184)

Select on the multi-information display using the meter control switches on the steering wheel. (

Select and then press and hold

Select “TPWS” and then press .

396

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Select “Set Pressure” then press and hold until the tire pressure warning light blinks 3 times.

Then a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

“---” will be displayed on the multi-information display for the inflation pressure of each tire while initialization is being performed.

Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes.

Initialization is complete when the position of each tire is determined and the inflation pressure of each tire is displayed on the multi-information display.

Initialization may take longer than approximately 1 hour in certain situations, such as when the vehicle is stopped for a long time at traffic lights, etc. ( 

P. 401)

◆

Registering ID codes

Every tire pressure warning valve and transmitter has a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID codes.

The ID codes can be registered on of the multi-information display.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

397

■ How to register the ID codes

Select on the multi-information display using the meter control switches on the steering wheel. (

Emergency flashers .......... 422

Select and then press and hold .

Select “TPWS” and then press .

Select “Change Wheel” then press and hold until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times.

Then a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

When registration is being performed, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute then illuminate and “---” will be displayed for the inflation pressure of each tire on the multiinformation display.

Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes.

Registration is complete when the tire pressure warning light turns off and the inflation pressure of each tire is displayed on the multiinformation display.

Registration may take longer than approximately 1 hour in certain situations, such as when the vehicle is stopped for a long time at traffic lights, etc. ( 

P. 403)

After registering the ID codes, make sure to initialize the tire pressure warning system. (

 P. 395)

398

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

■ Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID codes of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters are not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. In this case, after driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute and then illuminate to indicate a system malfunction.

■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

■ Low profile tires (vehicles with 18 or 19-inch wheels)

Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.

■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

For the GAWR, see the Certification

Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. ( 

P. 484)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

399

■ Tire types

● Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

● All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

● Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. ( 

P. 316)

■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly

● In the following situations, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used.

• If a tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original

Equipment) tire.

• If a tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.

• If tire chains, etc. are installed.

• If a window tint that affects radio wave signals is installed.

• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings.

• If the tire inflation pressure is much higher than the specified level.

• If wheels not equipped with tire pressure warning valve and transmitter are used.

• If the ID codes of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters are not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.

400

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

● Performance may be affected in the following situations.

• When driving near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be corrected by changing the location of the vehicle as the radio wave conditions may change.

● When the vehicle is stopped, the time taken for the warning to start or turn off may be longer.

● When the inflation pressure of a tire drops rapidly, for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not operate.

■ Initialization procedure

● Make sure to perform the initialization procedure after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.

Also, make sure the tires are cold before performing the initialization procedure or adjusting the tire inflation pressure.

● If the engine switch is turned off during initialization, it is not necessary to restart the initialization procedure from the beginning as it will begin automatically when the engine switch is turned back to IGNITION ON mode.

● If initialization has accidentally been started when it is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold and then perform the initialization procedure again.

● While the position of each tire is being determined and the inflation pressures are not being displayed on the multi-information display, if the inflation pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure warning light will come on.

■ Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system

The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accordance with the conditions under which it was initialized. For this reason, the system may give a warning even if the tire pressure does not reach a low enough level, or if the pressure is higher than the pressure that was adjusted to when the system was initialized.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

401

■ If the tire pressure warning system is not initialized properly

● In the following situations, initialization may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. (Usually, the vehicle will need to be driven for approximately 10 to 30 minutes to complete initialization.)

If initialization is not complete after driving approximately 30 minutes, continue driving for a while.

• If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved road, it may take longer to complete initialization.

• If the vehicle is backed up while performing initialization, data collected during initialization will be cleared and it will take longer than normal to complete.

• If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or another situation where other vehicles are driven close by, it may take time for the system to recognize the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters of your vehicle over those of other vehicles.

If initialization is not complete after driving for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes and then drive the vehicle again.

● In the following situations, initialization will not be started or was not completed properly and the system will not operate properly. Perform the initialization procedure again.

• If, when attempting to start initialization, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.

• If, when the vehicle has been driven for about 20 minutes after performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then illuminates.

● If initialization cannot be completed after performing the above procedure, contact your Toyota dealer.

402

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When registering ID codes

● Before performing ID code registration, make sure that no wheels with tire pressure warning valve and transmitters installed are near the vehicle.

● Make sure to initialize the tire pressure warning system after registering the ID codes. If the system is initialized before registering the ID codes, the initialized values will be invalid.

● As the tires will be warm when registration is completed, make sure to allow the tires to cool before performing initialization.

■ Canceling ID code registration

● To cancel ID code registration after it has been started, turn the engine switch off before driving the vehicle.

If the vehicle is driven after ID code registration is started, to cancel registration, perform the ID code registration start procedure again and turn the engine switch off before driving.

● If ID code registration has been canceled, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute when the engine switch is turned to

IGNITION ON mode and then illuminate. The tire pressure warning system will be operational when the tire pressure warning light turns off.

● If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, ID code registration may not have been cancelled correctly. To cancel registration, perform the ID code registration start procedure again and then turn the engine switch off before driving.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

403

■ If ID codes are not registered properly

● In the following situations, ID code registration may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. (Usually, the vehicle will need to be driven for approximately 10 to 30 minutes to complete ID code registration.)

If ID code registration is not complete after driving for approximately 30 minutes, continue driving for a while.

• If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved road, it may take longer than normal to complete registration.

• If the vehicle is backed up while performing registration, data collected during registration will be cleared, and it will take longer than normal to complete.

• If a wheel with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter installed is inside or near the vehicle, registration of the ID codes for the installed wheels may not be possible.

If ID registration is not complete after driving for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes and then perform the ID code registration procedure again.

● In the following situations, ID code registration will not be started or was not completed properly and the system will not operate properly. Perform the ID code registration procedure again.

• If, when attempting to start ID code registration, the tire pressure warning light does not blink slowly 3 times.

• If, when the vehicle has been driven for about 20 minutes after performing ID code registration, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then illuminates.

● If ID code registration cannot be completed after performing the above procedure, contact your Toyota dealer.

404

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Tire pressure warning system certification

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: PAXPMVE000

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Model: PMV-E000

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

405

WARNING

■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.

● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).

● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not initialize the tire pressure warning system without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

406

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valve and transmitters and tire valve caps

● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.

● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water may enter the valves of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters and the valves may become stuck.

● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. ( 

P. 395)

■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

■ Low profile tires (vehicles with 18 or 19-inch wheels)

Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:

● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely.

● Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.

■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. ( 

P. 478)

407

408

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Inspection and adjustment procedure

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.

If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure.

If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

Put the tire valve cap back on.

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.

Do not forget to check the spare.

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

● Reduced fuel economy

● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling

● Reduced tire life due to wear

● Reduced safety

● Damage to the drivetrain

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

409

■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

● Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.

● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.

● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

WARNING

■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

● Excessive wear

● Uneven wear

● Poor handling

● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

● Air leaking from between tire and wheel

● Wheel deformation and/or tire damage

● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)

NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.

If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

410

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset * .

Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Toyota does not recommend using the following:

● Wheels of different sizes or types

● Used wheels

● Bent wheels that have been straightened

Aluminum wheel precautions

● Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.

● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

● Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valve and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valve and transmitters must be installed. ( 

P. 395)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

411

WARNING

■ When replacing wheels

● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

■ When installing the wheel nuts

● Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered ends facing inward.

Installing the nuts with the tapered ends facing outward can cause the wheel to break and eventually cause the wheel to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Tapered portion

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

NOTICE

■ Replacing tire pressure warning valve and transmitters

● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your

Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valve and transmitters at your

Toyota dealer.

● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valve and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

412

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

Removal method

Turn the engine switch off.

Open the glove box and remove the glove box cover inside the glove box.

Remove the filter cover.

Unlock the filter cover.

2 Move the filter cover in the direction of the arrow, and then pull it out of the claws.

Remove the filter case.

There may be foreign objects on top of the air conditioning filter.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one.

The “  UP” marks shown on the filter and the filter case should be pointing up.

413

■ Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the

“Schedule maintenance guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

■ Air conditioning filter with deodorizing function

When fragrances are placed in your vehicle, the deodorizing effect may become significantly weakened in a short period.

When an air conditioning odor comes out continuously, replace the air conditioning filter.

NOTICE

■ When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

■ To prevent damage to the filter cover

When moving the filter cover in the direction of arrow to release the fitting, pay attention not to apply excessive force to the claws. Otherwise, the claws may be damaged.

414

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

You will need the following items:

● Flathead screwdriver

● Small flathead screwdriver

● Lithium battery CR2032

Replacing the battery

Release the lock and remove the mechanical key.

Remove the key cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the flathead screwdriver with a rag.

Remove the depleted battery using a small flathead screwdriver.

When removing the cover, the electronic key module may stick to the cover and the battery may not be visible. In this case, remove the electronic key module in order to remove the battery.

Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.

When installing the key cover and mechanical key, install by conducting

and

with the directions reversed.

Operate the be locked/unlocked.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

415

switch and check that the doors can

■ When replacing the key battery

Be careful not to lose the battery or any other small parts.

■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery

● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.

● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

■ If the key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

● The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function properly.

● The operational range will be reduced.

WARNING

■ Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.

Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

● Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.

● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

416

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Turn the engine switch off.

Open the fuse box cover.

 Engine compartment (type A)  Engine compartment (type B)

(if equipped)

Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

 Under the driver’s side instrument panel

Remove the lid.

Make sure to push the claw when removing/installing the lid.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.

Only type A fuses can be removed using the pullout tool.

417

Check if the fuse is blown.

 Type A  Type B

 Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

418

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ After a fuse is replaced

● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (

 P. 419)

● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■ If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

WARNING

■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE

■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Light bulbs

If any lights burn out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.

419

■ LED lights

The lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.

Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations:

● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.

● Water has built up inside the headlight.

420

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

421

When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ................. 423

If the vehicle is trapped in rising water.................. 424

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed ......................... 425

If you think something is wrong .............................. 428

Fuel pump shut off system ............................ 429

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds ............................ 430

If a warning message is displayed......................... 440

If you have a flat tire.......... 445

If the engine will not start................................. 457

If the electronic key does not operate properly........ 459

If the vehicle battery is discharged ...................... 462

If your vehicle overheats ........................ 466

If the vehicle becomes stuck ............................... 469

422

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped on the road due to a breakdown, etc.

Press the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash.

To turn them off, press the switch once again.

■ Emergency flashers

● If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating, the battery may discharge.

● If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) or in the event of a strong rear impact, the emergency flashers will turn on automatically.

The emergency flashers will turn off automatically after operating for approximately 20 minutes. To manually turn the emergency flashers off, press the switch twice.

(The emergency flashers may not turn on automatically depending on the force of the impact and conditions of the collision.)

7-1. Essential information

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

423

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.



If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.



Stop the engine.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.

To stop the engine, press and hold the engine switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession.

Press and hold for 2 seconds or more, or press briefly 3 times or more

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

WARNING

■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.

Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.

424

7-1. Essential information

If the vehicle is trapped in rising water

In the event the vehicle is submerged in water, remain calm and perform the following.

● Remove the seat belt first.

● If the door can be opened, open the door and exit the vehicle.

● If the door can not be opened, open the window using the power window switch and exit the vehicle through the window.

● If the window can not be opened using the power window switch, remain calm, wait until the water level inside the vehicle rises to the point that the water pressure inside of the vehicle equals the water pressure outside of the vehicle, and then open the door and exit the vehicle.

WARNING

■ Using an emergency hammer

for emergency escape

The rear side windows and rear window of this vehicle can be shattered by an emergency hammer

used for emergency escape, however, since the windshield and front side windows are laminated glass they can not be shattered by an emergency hammer

: Contact your Toyota dealer or aftermarket accessory manufacturer for further information about an emergency hammer.

■ Escaping the vehicle from the window

There are cases where escaping the vehicle from the window is not possible due to seating position, passenger body type, etc.

When using an emergency hammer, consider your seat location and the size of the window opening to ensure that the opening is accessible and large enough to escape.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed

425

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/ provincial and local laws.

Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service before towing.

● The engine is running but the vehicle does not move.

● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

 From the front  From the rear

Release the parking brake.

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

426

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Using a flatbed truck

If your vehicle is transported by a flatbed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.

Covers are installed to the tie-down holes. After transporting the vehicle, make sure to reinstall the covers to the holes.

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45  .

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

Front

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When towing the vehicle

Be sure to transport the vehicle with the front wheels raised or with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the front wheels contacting the ground, the drivetrain and related parts may be damaged.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

427

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is off. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

428

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms

● Fluid leaks under the vehicle.

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal

Audible symptoms

● Changes in exhaust sound

● Excessive tire squeal when cornering

● Strange noises related to the suspension system

● Pinging or other noises related to the engine

Operational symptoms

● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly

● Appreciable loss of power

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Fuel pump shut off system

429

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of fuel to the engine.

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.

Turn the engine switch off.

Restart the engine.

NOTICE

■ Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

430

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Warning light and warning buzzer list

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Red)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details/Actions

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

Indicates that:

• The brake fluid level is low; or

• The brake system is malfunctioning

 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

(Yellow)

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

Indicates a malfunction in the electric parking brake

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

High coolant temperature warning light (warning buzzer)

* 1

Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high

 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Handling method ( 

P. 466)

Charging system warning light

* 1

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system

 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Low engine oil pressure warning light (warning buzzer)

* 1

Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low

 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

431

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details/Actions

Malfunction indicator lamp

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system; or

• The electronic automatic transmission control system

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

SRS warning light (warning buzzer)

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system;

• The front passenger occupant classification system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

ABS warning light (warning buzzer)

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The ABS; or

• The brake assist system

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Brake Override System/Drive-Start Control/Intelligent

Clearance Sonar warning light (warning buzzer)

* 1

When a buzzer sounds:

• Brake Override System is malfunctioning;

• Drive-Start Control is operating;

• Drive-Start Control is malfunctioning; or

• The Intelligent Clearance Sonar (if equipped) is operating (

 P. 284)

 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.

When a buzzer does not sound:

Brake Override System is operating

 Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.

432

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

(Flashes)

(U.S.A.)

(Flashes)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details/Actions

Parking brake indicator (warning buzzer)

* 2

It is possible that the parking brake is not fully engaged or released

 Operate the parking brake once again.

This light comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is operating normally.

(Flashes)

Brake hold operated indicator

Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

(Red/yellow)

(Amber)

Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

LDA indicator

Indicates a malfunction in the LDA

 When “LDA Unavailable” is displayed on the multiinformation display, turn the LDA system off, drive the vehicle for a short time, and then turn the LDA system back on. (

 P. 242)

When a message other than above is displayed, follow the instructions displayed in the message.

(Flashes or illuminates)

PCS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or that the system is temporarily unavailable due to the vehicle being extremely hot/cold, or dirt around a front sensor, etc. (

 P. 236, 440)

 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (

 P. 236, 440)

If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability

Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.



P. 237

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

433

Warning light

(If equipped)

(Flashes)

Warning light/Details/Actions

ICS OFF indicator

When a buzzer sounds:

Indicates a malfunction in the Intelligent Clearance Sonar system

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

When a buzzer does not sound:

Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.

 Clear the dirt, etc.

Slip indicator

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system;

• The TRAC (Traction Control) system; or

• The ABS

The light will flash when the VSC or TRAC system is operating.

 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Low fuel level warning light

Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.2 gal. (8.3

L, 1.6 Imp. gal.)

* 3

Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.4 gal. (9.1

L, 2.0 Imp. gal.)

 Refuel the vehicle.

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

(warning buzzer)

* 4

Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts

 Fasten the seat belt.

If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.

Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights (warning buzzer)

* 5

Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts.

 Fasten the seat belt.

Master warning light (warning buzzer)

A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.



P. 440

434

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions

Tire pressure warning light

Indicates the following:

• Low tire pressure due to flat tire;

• Low tire pressure due to natural causes; or

• The tire pressure warning system is malfunctioning

 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Handling method (

 P. 436)

* 1

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

* 2

: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) or more.

* 3

: Vehicles with 215/55R17 tires

* 4

: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:

The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of

12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds.

Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds.

Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:

The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds.

Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds.

* 5

: Rear passenger’s seat belt buzzer:

The rear passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the rear passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds.

Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 30 more seconds.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

435

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear), driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors),

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, seat belt pretensioners, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. ( 

P. 38)

■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer

● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

● Is the fuel tank empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

● Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after several driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.

436

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punctured.

If a tire is punctured: 

P. 445

If none of the tires are punctured:

Turn the engine switch off then turn it to IGNITION ON mode. Check if the tire pressure warning light comes on or blinks.

 If the tire pressure warning light comes on

After the temperature of the tires has lowered sufficiently, check the inflation pressure of each tire and adjust them to the specified level.

If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, check that the inflation pressure of each tire is at the specified level and perform initialization. (

 P. 395)

If the warning light does not turn off several minutes after the initialization has been performed, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

 If the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then stays on

There may be a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire.

Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes.

■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly



P. 399

■ Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

437

WARNING

■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toyota dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the

ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

When the light comes on yellow, the assist to the power steering is restricted. When the light comes on red, the assist to the power steering is lost and handling operations of the steering wheel become extremely heavy. When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual.

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.

If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

438

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

■ Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

439

NOTICE

■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly

Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

440

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning message is displayed

The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions, incorrectly performed operations, and messages that indicate a need for maintenance. When a message is shown, perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message.

Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multiinformation display.

Multi-information display

Handling method

Follow the instructions of the message on the multi-information display.

If any of the warning messages are shown again after the appropriate actions have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

441

Messages and warnings

The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Comes on



Flashes

Comes on

Flashes

System warning light

Warning buzzer



Comes on or flashes



Warning

Sounds

Does not sound

Indicates an important situation, such as when a system related to driving is malfunctioning or that danger may result if the correction procedure is not performed

Indicates an important situation, such as when the systems shown on the multi-information display may be malfunctioning

Indicates a situation, such as when damage to the vehicle or danger may result

Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of electrical components, their condition, or indicates the need for maintenance

Indicates a situation, such as when an operation has been performed incorrectly, or indicates how to perform an operation correctly

The operation of the warning lights and warning buzzers may differ from those stated. In this case, perform the correction procedure according to the displayed message.

: A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information display.

442

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Warning messages

The warning messages explained below may differ from the actual messages according to operation conditions and vehicle specifications.

■ System warning lights

The master warning light does not come on or flash in the following cases.

Instead, a separate system warning light will come on along with a message shown on the multi-information display.

● Malfunction in the ABS

The ABS warning light comes on. (

● Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system

The tire pressure warning light comes on. ( 

P. 434)

● Remaining fuel level is low

The low fuel level warning light comes on. ( 

P. 184), consider each of the follow-

■ If a message instructing to refer to the Owner’s Manual is displayed

● If the following messages are shown, there may be a malfunction.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

• “Low Braking Power Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual”

• “Oil Pressure Low Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual”

• “Charging System Malfunction Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual”

● If the following message is shown, there may be a malfunction.

Immediately have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• “Smart Key System Malfunction See Owner’s Manual”

● If “Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual” is displayed, follow the instructions accordingly. (

 P. 466)

■ If “Shift to P Before Exiting Vehicle” is shown

Message is displayed when the driver’s door is opened without turning the engine switch off with the shift lever in any position other than P.

Shift the shift lever to P.

■ If “Auto Power Off to Conserve Battery” is displayed

Power was turned off due to the automatic power off function.

Next time when starting the engine, increase the engine speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

443

■ If “A New Key has been Registered Contact Your Dealer for Details” is displayed

This message will be displayed each time the driver’s door is opened when the doors are unlocked from the outside for approximately one week after a new electronic key has been registered.

If this message is displayed but you have not had a new electronic key registered, ask your Toyota dealer to check if an unknown electronic key (other than those in your possession) has been registered.

■ When “Headlight System Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed

The following systems may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

● The LED headlight system

● Automatic High Beam

■ “Front Camera Unavailable” or “Front Camera Unavailable Remove

Debris On Windshield” is displayed

The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in the message is resolved.

● PCS (Pre-Collision System)

● LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)

● Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

● Automatic High Beam

■ If “Maintenance Required Soon” is displayed

Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule

should be performed soon.

Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the message has been reset.

If necessary, perform maintenance. Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. (

 P. 373)

: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

■ If “Maintenance Required Visit Your Dealer” is displayed

Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule

Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the message has been reset.

(The indicator will not work properly unless the message has been reset.)

Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. (

 P. 373)

: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

444

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ If “Engine Oil Level Low Add or Replace” is displayed

The engine oil level may be low. Check the level of the engine oil, and add engine oil if necessary. This message may be displayed if the vehicle is stopped on a slope. Move the vehicle to a level surface and check if the message disappears.

■ Warning buzzer



P. 436

NOTICE

■ If “High Power Consumption Power to Climate Temporarily Limited” is frequently shown

There is a possible malfunction relating to the charging system or the battery may be deteriorating. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire

445

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with the spare tire.

For details about tires:

 P. 393

WARNING

■ If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle

● Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.

● Set the parking brake.

● Shift the shift lever to P.

● Stop the engine.

● Turn on the emergency flashers. (

 P. 422)

446

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Luggage floor cover

Wheel nut wrench

Jack

Spare tire

Jack handle

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

447

WARNING

■ Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions.

Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury.

● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.

● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

● Put the jack properly in its jack point.

● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.

● Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.

● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when using a jack

When jacking up the rear of the vehicle, make sure not to position the jack under the bracket shown in the illustration near the rear jack point, as the vehicle body may be damaged.

448

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the jack

Lift up the hook of the luggage floor cover on the trunk floor.

Secure the luggage floor cover using the hook provided.

Remove the jack.

Taking out the spare tire

Lift up the hook of the luggage floor cover on the trunk floor.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Secure the luggage floor cover using the hook provided.

449

Remove the tool tray.

Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.

When taking out or stowing the spare tire, make sure to firmly hold opposite end of the tire.

WARNING

■ When storing the spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

450

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Replacing a flat tire

Chock the tires.

Front

Rear

Flat tire

Left-hand side

Wheel chock positions

Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire

Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire

Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

To prevent damage to the vehicle when using the jack, position the jack in the correct location.

( 

P. 447)

The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions.

Assemble the jack handle.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

451

Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

452

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

■ Replacing a flat tire

● Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103

N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving.

• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel.

• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. ( 

P. 411)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

453

Installing the spare tire

Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.

Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

Tapered portion

Disc wheel seat

Lower the vehicle.

Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque:

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

454

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ The compact spare tire

● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” on the tire sidewall.

Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.

● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.

(

 P. 478)

■ When using the compact spare tire

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

■ When the compact spare tire is equipped

When driving with the compact spare tire installed, the vehicle height will be different than when driving with standard tires.

■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice

Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle.

Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:

Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.

Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle.

Fit tire chains to the front tires.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

455

WARNING

■ When using the compact spare tire

● Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.

● Do not use more than one compact spare tires simultaneously.

● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

■ When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

• ABS & Brake assist

• VSC

• TRAC

• EPS

• Automatic High Beam

• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

• LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)

• PCS (Pre-Collision System)

: If equipped

• Tire pressure warning system

• BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

• Intuitive parking assist

• Toyota parking assist monitor

• Panoramic view monitor

• Navigation system

• Intelligent Clearance Sonar

(ICS)

• Rear view monitor system

■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■ After using the tools and jack

Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.

456

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE

■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle.

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

■ When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters

P. 395)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the engine will not start

457

If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed ( 

ing points:

The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates normally.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

● The engine may be flooded.

Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.

( 

P. 184)

● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.

( 

P. 77)

The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● The battery may be discharged. (

 P. 462)

● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

The starter motor does not turn over

The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse.

However, an interim measure is available to start the engine.

( 

P. 458)

458

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

● The battery may be discharged. (

 P. 462)

● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

Emergency start function

When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning normally:

Set the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode.

Press and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

459

If the electronic key does not operate properly

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted ( 

P. 137) or the electronic key cannot be used

because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened and the engine can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions

■ Doors

Using the mechanical key (

 P.

122) in order to perform the fol-

lowing operations (driver’s door only):

Locks all doors

Closes the windows and the moon roof * 1 (turn and hold) * 2

Unlocks the door

Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key once again unlocks the other doors.

Opens the windows and the moon roof * 1 (turn and hold) * 2

* 1

: If equipped

* 2

: This setting must be customized at your Toyota dealer.

460

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Trunk

Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open.

Starting the engine

Ensure that the shift lever is in P and firmly depress the brake pedal.

Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the engine switch.

When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the engine switch will turn to IGNITION

ON mode.

When the smart key system is deactivated in customization setting, the engine switch will turn to

ACCESSORY mode.

Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that on the multi-information display.

Press the engine switch shortly and firmly.

is displayed

In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Toyota dealer.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

461

■ Stopping the engine

Shift the shift lever to P and press the engine switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.

■ Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.

( 

P. 414)

■ Changing engine switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the engine switch in step

above.

The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (

 P. 185)

■ When the electronic key does not work properly

● Make sure that the smart key system has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.

(Customizable features: 

P. 497)

● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function.

(

 P. 136)

WARNING

■ When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or moon roof

Operate the power window or moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window or moon roof. Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window or moon roof.

462

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged.

You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.

Confirm that the electronic key is being carried.

When connecting the jumper (or booster) cables, depending on the situation, the alarm may activate and doors locked. ( 

P. 82)

Open the hood. ( 

P. 381)

Remove the engine cover.

Make sure to pull the engine cover straight up when removing it.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:

463

Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle.

Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the engine switch off.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, then start the vehicle's engine.

Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

464

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

■ To prevent battery discharge

● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.

● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

■ When the battery is removed or discharged

● Information stored in the ECU is cleared. When the battery is depleted, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.

● Some systems may require initialization. (

 P. 505)

■ When removing the battery terminals

When the battery terminals are removed, the information stored in the ECU is cleared. Before removing the battery terminals, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)

■ When recharging or replacing the battery

● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart key system when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.

● The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.

● The engine switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the battery, turn the engine switch off.

If you are unsure what mode the engine switch was in before the battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the battery.

■ When replacing the battery

● Use a battery that conforms to European regulations.

● Use a battery that the case size is same as the previous one (LN3), 20 hour rate capacity (20HR) is equivalent (70Ah) or greater, and performance rating

(CCA) is equivalent (603A) or greater.

• If the sizes differ, the battery cannot be properly secured.

• If the 20 hour rate capacity is low, even if the time period where the vehicle is not used is a short time, the battery may discharge and the engine may not be able to start.

● For details, consult your Toyota dealer.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

465

WARNING

■ When removing the battery terminals

Always remove the negative (-) terminal first. If the positive (+) terminal contacts any metal in the surrounding area when the positive (+) terminal is removed, a spark may occur, leading to a fire in addition to electrical shocks and death or serious injury.

■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery:

● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.

● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal.

● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other.

● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.

■ Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery:

● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

● Do not lean over the battery.

● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.

● Do not allow children near the battery.

NOTICE

■ When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fan or engine drive belt.

466

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.

● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge ( 

P. 90)

enters the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)

● “Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s

Manual” is shown on the multi-information display.

● Steam comes out from under the hood.

Correction procedures

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the engine.

If you see steam:

Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.

If you do not see steam:

Carefully lift the hood.

After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

Radiator

Cooling fan

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

467

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.

Reservoir

“F” line

“L” line

Radiator cap

Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.

Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fan operates and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.

The fan operates when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

If the fan is not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.

If the fan is operating:

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.

468

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.

● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.

● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fan and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in serious injury.

● Do not loosen the radiator cap and the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot.

High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.

NOTICE

■ When adding engine coolant

Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.

When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.

■ To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).

● Do not use any coolant additives.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck

469

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the front wheels.

Place wood, stones or some other material under the front wheels to help provide traction.

Restart the engine.

Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

470

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press to turn off TRAC.

WARNING

■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people.

The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

● Avoid spinning the front wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary.

● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

471

Vehicle specifications

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.).......... 472

Fuel information ................ 481

Tire information ................. 484

8-2. Customization

Customizable features ...... 497

8-3. Items to initialize

Items to initialize ............... 505

472

8-1.Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weights

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

* 1

Wheelbase

Front

Tread

Rear

Vehicle capacity weight

(occupants + luggage)

* 1

: Unladen vehicles

* 2

: Vehicles with 215/55R17 tires

195.9 in. (4975 mm)

72.8 in. (1850 mm)

56.5 in. (1435 mm)

113.0 in. (2870 mm)

62.6 in. (1590 mm)

63.0 in. (1600 mm)

* 2

63.2 in. (1605 mm)

63.6 in. (1615 mm)

* 2

940 lb. (425 kg)

8-1. Specifications

473

Vehicle identification

■ Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your

Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel.

This number is also on the Certification Label.

474

8-1. Specifications

■ Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

Engine

Model

Type

Bore and stroke

Displacement

Valve clearance

Drive belt tension

2GR-FKS

6-cylinder V type,

4-cycle, gasoline

3.70  3.27 in.

(94.0  83.0 mm)

210.9 cu. in. (3456 cm

)

Automatic adjustment

Fuel

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only

Octane rating

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher

14.5 gal. (55 L, 12.0 Imp. gal.)

16.0 gal. (60.6 L, 13.3 Imp. gal.)

: Vehicles with 215/55R17 tires

8-1. Specifications

475

Lubrication system

Oil capacity

(Drain and refill ― reference

)

With filter

Without filter

5.7 qt. (5.4 L, 4.8 Imp. qt.)

5.6 qt. (5.3 L, 4.7 Imp. qt.)

: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use

Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE

5W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-

20 at the next oil change.

Outside temperature

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

476

8-1. Specifications

How to read oil container label:

The International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

Cooling system

Capacity

(Reference)

Coolant type

9.1 qt. (8.6 L, 7.6 Imp. qt.)

Use either of the following:

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system

Spark plug

Make

Gap

DENSO FK20HBR8

0.031 in. (0.8 mm)

NOTICE

■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust spark plug gap.

8-1. Specifications

477

Electrical system

Battery

Specific voltage reading at

68  F (20  C):

Charging rates

12.3 V or higher

If the voltage is lower than the standard value, charge the battery.

(When checking the voltage, after turning the engine switch off, wait for 30 seconds with the high beam headlights illuminated, then turn the high beam headlights off and check the voltage.)

5 A max.

Automatic transaxle

Fluid capacity

Fluid type

7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp. qt.)

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.

If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■ Transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of the transmission accompanied by vibration and, ultimately, damage to the vehicle’s transmission.

478

8-1. Specifications

Brakes

Pedal clearance

Pedal free play

Brake pad wear limit

3.2 in. (81 mm)

0.04  0.24 in. (1  6 mm)

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Fluid type

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 67 lbf (300 N, 31 kgf) while the engine is running.

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Tires and wheels



17-inch tires

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

215/55R17 94V, T155/70D17 110M

Driving under normal conditions

Front:

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm 2

Rear:

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

or bar)

Spare:

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

2 or bar)

Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph

[160 km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm 2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

17  7 1/2 J, 17  4 T (compact spare)

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

8-1. Specifications

479



18-inch tires

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

235/45R18 94V, T155/70D17 110M

Driving under normal conditions

Front:

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm 2

Rear:

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

or bar)

Spare:

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

2 or bar)

Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph

[160 km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm 2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

18  8 J, 17  4 T (compact spare)

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

 19-inch tires

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

235/40R19 92V, T155/70D17 110M

Driving under normal conditions

Front:

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

Rear:

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

or bar)

Spare:

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

or bar)

Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph

[160 km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm

or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

19  8 J, 19  8.5 J, 17  4 T (compact spare)

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

480

8-1. Specifications

Light bulbs *

Interior

Light bulbs

Door courtesy lights

Vanity lights

Trunk light

Bulb No.

168

7065



A: Wedge base bulbs

B: Double end bulbs

: Light bulbs not listed in this table are LED bulbs.

1.4

Type

8-1. Specifications

481

Fuel information

You must only use unleaded gasoline.

Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of

ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A..

■ Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.

● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.

● Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.

482

8-1. Specifications

■ Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline

Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.

Toyota recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions.

■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline

● Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol.

DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled

E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than

15% ethanol).

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol.

(30% ethanol)

(50% ethanol)

(85% ethanol)

● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

■ If your engine knocks

● Consult your Toyota dealer.

● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

8-1. Specifications

483

NOTICE

■ Notice on fuel quality

● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.

● Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.

At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■ When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

484

8-1. Specifications

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

 Full-size tire



Compact spare tire

8-1. Specifications

485

Tire size ( 

P. 487)

Summer tires or all season tires (

 P. 399)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire.

A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) ( 

P. 486)

Location of treadwear indicators (

 P. 393)

Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (

 P. 478)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (

 P. 398)

Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

486

8-1. Specifications

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

 Type A  Type B

DOT symbol *

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire manufacturer’s identification mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

Manufacturer’s code

: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

8-1. Specifications

Tire size

■ Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

Tire use

(P = Passenger car [sometimes omitted],

T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio

(tire height to section width)

Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)

■ Tire dimensions

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

487

488

8-1. Specifications

Tire section names

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

8-1. Specifications

489

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the

U.S. Department of Transportation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

■

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

■

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

■

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

490

8-1. Specifications

■ Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

8-1. Specifications

491

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term

Cold tire inflation pressure

Maximum pressure

Normal weight inflation

Recommended inflation pressure

Accessory weight

Curb weight

Maximum loaded vehicle weight occupant

Occupant distribution

Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment

(whether installed or not)

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 that follows

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1

below

492

8-1. Specifications

Production weight

Rim

Tire related term options

Meaning

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter

(Wheel diameter)

Rim size designation

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim type designation

Rim width

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Vehicle normal load on the tire

Weather side

Bead

Bead separation

Rim diameter and width

The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Nominal distance between rim flanges

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.

(68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1

below), and dividing by two

The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

8-1. Specifications

493

Tire related term

Bias ply tire

Carcass

Chunking

Cord

Cord separation

Cracking

Extra load tire

Groove

Innerliner

Innerliner separation

Intended sidewall outboard

Meaning

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

The strands forming the plies in the tire

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

494

8-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Light truck (LT) tire

Load rating

Maximum load rating

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

Measuring rim

Open splice

Outer diameter

Overall width

Passenger car tire

Ply

Ply separation

Pneumatic tire

Radial ply tire

Reinforced tire

Meaning

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

8-1. Specifications

495

Tire related term

Section width

Sidewall

Sidewall separation

Snow tire

Test rim

Tread

Tread rib

Tread separation

Treadwear indicators

(TWI)

Meaning

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-

1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in

ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for

Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight

Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( on at least one sidewall

)

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

: Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

496

8-1. Specifications

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants

2 through 4

5 through 10

11 through 15

16 through 20

Vehicle normal load,

Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2 in front

2 in front, 1 in second seat

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

8-2. Customization

497

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed using the multi-information display, on the audio system screen, or at your Toyota dealer.

Customizing vehicle features

When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a safe place with the shift lever in P and the parking brake set.

■ Changing on the audio system screen

Press the “MENU” button.

Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

Select “General” or “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.

Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details.

■ Changing using the multi-information display

 P. 100

498

8-2. Customization

Customizable features

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Settings that can be changed on the audio system screen

2 Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer

Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available

■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display (

P. 90, 93)

Function Default setting Customized setting

1 2

Language

Units

Convenience services

(Suggestion function)

English miles (MPG US)

French

Spanish miles (MPG Imperial) km (L/100 km) km (km/L)

(when the vehicle is stopped)

Off

: The default setting varies according to country.

O —

O O

8-2. Customization

499

■ Door lock ( 

P. 125, 131, 459)

Function

Unlocking using a mechanical key

Automatic door lock

Automatic door unlock

Default setting Customized setting

1 2

Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps

All doors unlocked in one step

— O

Shift position linked door locking operation

Shift position linked door unlocking operation

Off

Speed linked door locking operation

Off

Driver’s door linked door unlocking operation

O O

Locking/unlocking of the trunk when all doors are locked/unlocked

On Off

■ Smart key system and wireless remote control

( 

P. 125, 131, 135)

— O

Function

Operating signal

(Buzzers)

Operation signal

(Emergency flashers)

Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked

Open door warning buzzer

Default setting Customized setting

5 Off to 7

1 2

O O

60 seconds

Off

30 seconds

120 seconds

Off

O O

— O

500

8-2. Customization

■ Smart key system ( 

P. 125, 131, 135)

Function

Smart key system

Smart door unlocking

Time elapsed before unlocking all the door when gripping and holding the driver’s door handle

Number of consecutive door lock operations

Default setting Customized setting

All the doors

2 seconds

2 times

Off

Driver’s door

Off

1 2

— O

O O

— O

As many as desired — O

■ Wireless remote control (

P. 122, 125, 131)

Function

Wireless remote control

Unlocking operation

Trunk unlocking operation

Panic function

Reservation lock

Default setting

Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps

Customized setting

Off

1 2

— O

All doors unlocked in one step

O O

Press and hold

(short)

One short press

Push twice

Press and hold (long)

— O

Off

Off — O

Off O O

8-2. Customization

■ Power windows and moon roof * (

Reporting safety defects for

P. 160, 164)

501

Function

Mechanical key linked operation

Wireless remote control linked operation

Wireless remote control linked operation signal

(buzzer)

: If equipped

■ Moon roof * ( 

P. 164)

Default setting Customized setting

Off

On (open only)

Off

1 2

— O

Function Default setting Customized setting

Linked operation of components when mechanical key is used (open only)

Slide only

Linked operation of components when wireless remote control is used

Slide only

: If equipped

■ Driving position memory * (

 P. 146)

Tilt only

1 2

— O

Function

Selecting doors linked to the memory recall function

Driver’s seat movement when exiting the vehicle

Default setting Customized setting

Driver’s door

Standard

All doors

1 2

— O

O O

Steering wheel movement

Tilt only

Off

Partial

Telescopic only

Tilt & telescopic

Off

O O

: If equipped

502

8-2. Customization

■ Automatic light control system (

 P. 202)

Function

Light sensor sensitivity

Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed

■ Lights (

 P. 202)

Default setting Customized setting

Standard

30 seconds

-2 to 2

Off

60 seconds

90 seconds

1 2

O O

Function Default setting Customized setting

Daytime running light system

Welcome lighting On

Windshield wiper linked headlight illumination

: Except for Canada

■ Intuitive parking assist * (

 P. 276)

Off

1 2

O O

— O

Function

Detection distance of the front center sensor

Detection distance of the rear center sensor

: If equipped

Default setting Customized setting

Far Near

1 2

— O

Far Near — O

8-2. Customization

503

■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ( 

P. 261)

Function

Outside rear view mirror indicator brightness

Default setting Customized setting

Bright

■ RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) (

 P. 261)

Dim

1 2

— O

Function

Buzzer volume

Default setting Customized setting

2 1 to 3

■ Driving mode select switches ( 

P. 305)

1 2

— O

Function Default setting Customized setting

Powertrain control in customized mode

Normal

Power

Eco

Chassis control in customized mode

Air conditioning operation in customized mode

Normal

: If equipped

■ Automatic air conditioning system (

 P. 322)

Sport

Eco

1 2

O —

Function

A/C auto switch operation

Default setting Customized setting

Auto Manual

1 2

O O

504

8-2. Customization

■ Illumination (

 P. 332)

Function

Time elapsed before lights turn off

Default setting Customized setting

15 seconds

Off

7.5 seconds

30 seconds

1 2

O O

Operation after the engine switch turned off

Operation when the doors are unlocked

Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person

Ambient lights

: If equipped

WARNING

Off

— O

■ During customization

As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■ During customization

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing features.

8-3. Items to initialize

505

Items to initialize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:

Item

Message indicating maintenance is required

Tire pressure warning system

Intelligent Clearance Sonar

(ICS) (If equipped)

When to initialize

• After the maintenance is performed

• When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weight

• When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when the tire size is changed

• When rotating the tires

• After performing the transmitter ID code registration procedure

• After reconnecting or changing the battery

Reference

P. 373

P. 395

P. 295

506

8-3. Items to initialize

For owners

U.S. owners............................. 508

Seat belt instructions for

Canadian owners

(in French) ............................... 509

SRS airbag instructions for

Canadian owners

(in French) ............................... 511

507

508

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-

331-4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov

; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New

Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

509

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

(in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in

English.

Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité

● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur l'épaule, sans pour autant

être en contact avec le cou ou glisser de l'épaule.

● Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.

● Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos droit et calez-vous bien dans le siège.

● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.

Entretien et soin

■ Ceintures de sécurité

Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humidifiés avec de l'eau savonneuse tiède. Vérifiez régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas usées, effilochées ou entaillées excessivement.

510

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité

Inspectez le système de ceintures de sécurité régulièrement. Contrôlez l'absence de coupures, d'effilochages et de pièces desserrées. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée.

Une ceinture de sécurité endommagée ne permet pas de protéger un occupant de blessures graves ou mortelles.

511

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

◆ Coussins gonflables frontaux SRS

Coussin gonflable conducteur/coussin gonflable du passager avant SRS

Participe à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et du passager avant contre les chocs contre les éléments de l'habitacle

Coussins gonflables de genoux SRS

Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant

512

◆ Coussins gonflables latéraux et rideaux SRS

Coussins gonflables latéraux avant SRS

Participent à la protection du torse des occupants de siège avant

Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière SRS

Participent à la protection du torse des occupants des sièges latéraux arrière

Coussin gonflable rideau SRS

● Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants des sièges latéraux

● Peut contribuer à empêcher les occupants d’être éjectés du véhicule en cas de tonneau

Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS

513

Capteurs d'impact avant

Système de classification de l'occupant du siège passager avant (ECU et capteurs)

Coussins gonflables de genoux

Capteurs d'impact latéral

(portes avant)

Capteurs d'impact latéral

(avant)

Coussin gonflable passager avant

Coussins gonflables latéraux avant

Coussins gonflables rideaux

Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière

Témoins indicateurs “AIR

BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”

Témoin d'avertissement SRS

Ensemble de capteurs de coussins gonflables

Capteurs d'impact latéral

(arrière)

Coussin gonflable conducteur

Contact de boucle de ceinture de sécurité conducteur

Prétensionneurs de ceintures de sécurité et limiteurs de force

Capteur de position du siège conducteur

514

Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLI-

GENTS conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). L'ensemble de capteurs de coussins gonflables (ECU) régule le déploiement des coussins gonflables sur la base des informations qu'il reçoit des capteurs, etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les composants du système.

Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité du choc et l'occupation du véhicule par les passagers. Le déploiement rapide des coussins gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.

515

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les coussins gonflables

SRS.

Le non-respect de ces précautions peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter correctement leur ceinture de sécurité.

Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires à utiliser avec les ceintures de sécurité.

● Le coussin gonflable conducteur SRS se déploie avec une force considérable, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis (NHTSA) conseille:

La zone à risque du coussin gonflable conducteur se situant dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de déploiement, vous placer à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre coussin gonflable conducteur vous garantit une marge de sécurité suffisante. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le centre du volant et le sternum. Si vous êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs façons:

• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, de manière à pouvoir encore atteindre confortablement les pédales.

• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.

Bien que les véhicules aient une conception différente, un grand nombre de conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné le dossier de votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou remontez le siège si votre véhicule est équipé de cette fonction.

• Si votre volant est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet d'orienter le coussin gonflable en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que de votre tête et de votre cou.

Réglez votre siège selon les recommandations de la NHTSA ci-dessus, tout en conservant le contrôle des pédales, du volant et la vue des commandes du tableau de bord.

516

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

● Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture de sécurité à la boucle de ceinture de sécurité du conducteur sans l'attacher au pêne de la ceinture de sécurité du conducteur, les coussins gonflables frontaux SRS du conducteur déterminent que le conducteur a attaché sa ceinture de sécurité bien que la ceinture de sécurité ne soit pas attachée. Dans ce cas, les coussins gonflables frontaux

SRS du conducteur peuvent ne pas se déployer correctement en cas de collision, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles. Veillez à porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.

● Le coussin gonflable passager avant SRS se déploie également avec une force considérable, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager avant doit être éloigné le plus possible du coussin gonflable en réglant le dossier de siège de façon à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit dans le siège.

● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou attachés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un coussin gonflable. Un nourrisson ou un enfant trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement attaché au moyen d'un siège de sécurité enfant. Toyota recommande vivement d'installer tous les nourrissons et enfants sur les sièges arrière du véhicule et de prévoir pour eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège du passager avant.

● N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé.

En cas d'accident, la force engendrée par le déploiement rapide du coussin gonflable du passager avant peut blesser grièvement, voire tuer l'enfant si le siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route est installé sur le siège du passager avant.

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et ne vous appuyez pas contre la planche de bord.

● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout devant le coussin gonflable passager avant SRS ou s'asseoir sur les genoux du passager avant.

● Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur les genoux.

● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte, le rail latéral de toit ou les montants avant, latéraux et arrière.

● Ne laissez personne s'agenouiller sur les sièges passagers en appui contre la porte ou sortir la tête ou les mains à l'extérieur du véhicule.

517

518

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

● Ne fixez rien et ne posez rien sur des emplacements tels que la planche de bord, la garniture du volant et la partie inférieure du tableau de bord.

Ces éléments peuvent se transformer en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables conducteur, passager avant et genoux SRS se déploient.

● Ne fixez rien aux portes, au pare-brise, aux vitres, aux montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral de toit et à la poignée de maintien.

● Ne suspendez aucun cintre ou objet dur aux crochets à vêtements. Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des blessures graves, voire mortelles en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables rideaux SRS.

519

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

● Si un cache en vinyle est placé sur la zone où le coussin gonflable de genoux SRS se déploie, assurez-vous de le retirer.

● N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège recouvrant les zones de déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux SRS, car il risque de gêner le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux de fonctionner correctement, désactiver le système ou entraîner le déploiement accidentel des coussins gonflables latéraux, occasionnant des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux parties renfermant les composants de coussins gonflables SRS ou aux portes avant.

En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS.

● Ne touchez aucun composant immédiatement après le déploiement (gonflage) des coussins gonflables SRS, car ils peuvent être chauds.

● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger.

Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la peau.

● Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, comme les garnitures du volant et des montants avant et arrière, sont endommagées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Toyota.

● Ne placez rien sur le siège du passager avant, comme un coussin par exemple. Cela a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager sur toute la surface du siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter correctement le poids du passager. En conséquence, les coussins gonflables frontaux SRS du passager avant risquent de ne pas se déployer en cas de collision.

520

AVERTISSEMENT

■ Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS

Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au rebut et ne procédez à aucune des modifications suivantes sans consulter votre concessionnaire Toyota. Les coussins gonflables SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement ou se déployer (se gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant la mort ou de graves blessures.

● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables

SRS

● Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière, des rails latéraux de toit, des panneaux de porte avant, des garnitures de porte avant ou des haut-parleurs de porte avant

● Modifications du panneau de porte avant (par exemple, perçage d'un trou dans le panneau)

● Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du pare-chocs avant ou des flancs de l'habitacle

● Installation d'un protège-calandre (pare-buffle, pare-kangourou, etc.), de chasse-neige, de treuils, ou d'un porte-bagages de toit

● Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule

● Installation d'appareils électroniques tels que les émetteurs/récepteurs radios mobiles et les lecteurs CD

● Modifications de votre véhicule pour une personne atteinte d'un handicap physique

521

Index

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting) .................... 522

Alphabetical index ..................... 525

For information regarding the equipment listed below, refer to “NAV-

IGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

• Navigation system

• Audio/visual system

• Toyota parking assist monitor

• Panoramic view monitor

• Toyota Entune

522

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Toyota dealer.

The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed

You lose your keys

● If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. (

 P. 123)

● If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. (

 P. 124)

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

● Is the key battery weak or depleted? (

A/C ............................................ 322

● Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?

When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. (

 P. 185)

● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?

When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. ( 

P. 123, 137)

The rear door cannot be opened

● Is the child-protector lock set?

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. ( 

P. 128)

The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside

● The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the trunk will operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take the key out from the trunk. (

 P. 132)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

523

If you think something is wrong

The engine does not start

● Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?

( 

P. 184)

● Is the shift lever in P? ( 

P. 186)

● Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? ( 

P. 135)

● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (

 P. 186)

● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?

In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (

 P. 460)

● Is the battery discharged? (

 P. 462)

The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake pedal

● Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?

If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode. ( 

P. 193)

The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is stopped

● It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. ( 

P. 186)

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches

● Is the window lock switch pressed?

The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (

 P. 160)

The engine switch is turned off automatically

● The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCES-

SORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not running) for a period of time. ( 

P. 186)

524

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

A warning buzzer sounds during driving

● The seat belt reminder light is flashing

Are the driver and the passenger wearing the seat belts? (

 P. 433)

● The parking brake indicator is on

Is the parking brake released? (

 P. 196)

Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound.

( 

P. 430, 440)

An alarm is activated and the horn sounds

● Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?

The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. ( 

P. 80)

Do one of the following to stop the alarm:

• Unlock the doors.

• Open the trunk using the entry function or wireless remote control.

• Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine.

A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle

● Is the message displayed on the multi-information display?

Check the message on the multi-information display. (

 P. 440)

A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed

● When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to

P. 430, 440.

When a problem has occurred

If you have a flat tire

● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire. ( 

P. 445)

The vehicle becomes stuck

● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. ( 

P. 469)

Alphabetical index

525

Alphabetical index

Air conditioning filter ............. 412

Automatic air

conditioning system............ 322

ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System)...... 309

Warning light......................... 431

Adaptive Variable

Suspension System .............. 310

Air conditioning filter .............. 412

Air conditioning

system.................................... 322

Air conditioning filter ............. 412

Automatic air

conditioning system............ 322

Airbags ....................................... 36

Airbag operating conditions .... 45

Airbag precautions for

your child .............................. 39

Correct driving posture ........... 28

Curtain shield airbag

operating conditions ............. 46

Curtain shield airbag

precautions........................... 42

Front passenger occupant

classification system............. 50

General airbag precautions .... 39

Locations of airbags................ 36

Modification and disposal

of airbags.............................. 44

Side airbag operating

conditions ............................. 46

Side airbag precautions .......... 39

Side and curtain shield airbags operating

conditions ............................. 46

Side and curtain shield

airbags precautions.............. 39

SRS airbag instructions for

Canadian owners ............... 511

SRS airbags ........................... 36

SRS warning light ................. 431

Alarm .......................................... 80

Ambient lights ......................... 334

Anchor brackets ........................ 60

Antennas

(smart key system) ............... 135

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) ...................................... 309

Warning light......................... 431

Approach warning................... 256

Armrest..................................... 355

Assist grips.............................. 355

Audio/visual system

Automatic air

conditioning system ............. 322

Air conditioning filter ............. 412

Automatic High Beam ............. 206

Automatic light control

system.................................... 202

Automatic transmission ......... 189

If the shift lever

cannot be shifted from P .... 193

Paddle shift switches ............ 191

S mode ................................. 190

Auxiliary boxes........................ 339

: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

526

Alphabetical index

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulb .............. 419

Battery ...................................... 390

Battery checking ................... 390

If the battery is discharged.... 462

Preparing and checking

Replacing.............................. 464

Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) ....... 261

Blind Spot Monitor

function............................... 265

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

function............................... 267

Bottle holders .......................... 337

Brake

Brake Hold ............................ 200

Fluid ...................................... 478

Parking brake........................ 196

Warning light......................... 430

Brake assist ............................. 309

Brake Hold................................ 200

Brake override system ............ 171

Break-in tips ............................ 171

Brightness control

Ambient lights ....................... 334

Instrument panel light

control................................... 91

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ....... 261

Blind Spot Monitor

function............................... 265

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

function............................... 267

Care

Aluminum wheels ................. 367

Exterior ................................. 366

Interior .................................. 369

Seat belts.............................. 370

Cargo capacity......................... 181

Cargo net.................................. 341

Chains ...................................... 317

Child restraint system............... 56

Booster seats, definition ......... 57

Booster seats, installation....... 66

Convertible seats, definition ... 57

Convertible seats,

installation ............................ 64

Front passenger occupant

classification system ............ 50

Infant seats, definition............. 57

Infant seats, installation .......... 63

Installing CRS

with LATCH anchors ............ 61

Installing CRS

with seat belts ...................... 63

Installing CRS

with top tether strap.............. 67

Alphabetical index

527

Child safety ................................ 55

Airbag precautions.................. 39

Battery precautions....... 391, 465

Child restraint system ............. 56

How your child should wear

the seat belt.......................... 32

Installing child restraints ......... 60

Moon roof precautions .......... 167

Power window lock switch .... 160

Power window precautions ... 163

Rear door child-protectors .... 128

Removed electronic key

battery precautions............. 415

Seat belt extender

precautions........................... 35

Seat belt precautions .............. 34

Seat heater precautions........ 329

Trunk precautions ................. 133

Child-protectors....................... 128

Cleaning ........................... 366, 369

Aluminum wheels.................. 367

Exterior ................................. 366

Interior................................... 369

Seat belts.............................. 370

Coat hooks ............................... 356

Condenser................................ 388

Console box ............................. 336

Consumption

screen............................... 97, 116

Coolant

Capacity................................ 476

Checking............................... 387

Preparing and checking

Cooling system........................ 387

Engine overheating............... 466

Cornering lights....................... 203

Cruise control

Dynamic radar cruise control

Cup holders ............................. 338

Curtain shield airbags............... 37

Customizable features ............ 497

Customized mode ................... 305

Daytime running light

system.................................... 204

Defogger

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 324

Rear window......................... 324

Windshield ............................ 324

Dimensions .............................. 472

Dinghy towing.......................... 183

Display

Dynamic radar cruise control

with steering control) .......... 243

LDA (Lane Departure Alert

Multi-information display......... 93

Warning messages............... 440

Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 379

Door courtesy lights

Location ................................ 332

Doors .................................... 125

Door lock

Smart key system ................. 125

Wireless remote control........ 125

Doors ........................................ 125

Automatic door locking

and unlocking systems....... 128

Door lock .............................. 127

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 157

Rear door child-protector...... 128

Side doors ............................ 125

Side windows........................ 160

Drive-Start Control .................. 171

Driver’s seat belt

reminder light ........................ 433

528

Alphabetical index

Driver’s seat position

memory .................................. 146

Driving

Break-in tips.......................... 171

Correct posture ....................... 28

Driving mode select

switches.............................. 305

Procedures ........................... 170

Winter drive tips .................... 316

Driving information ................... 97

Driving position memory ........ 146

Memory recall function.......... 149

Power easy access

system ................................ 146

Dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range ............ 248

Eco drive mode........................ 305

Eco Driving Indicator .............. 107

EDR

(Event data recorder) .............. 11

Electric Power Steering

(EPS)....................................... 310

Electronic key .......................... 122

Battery-saving function ......... 137

If the electronic key does

not operate properly ........... 459

Replacing the battery............ 414

Emergency flashers ................ 422

Emergency, in case of

If a warning buzzer

sounds................................ 430

If a warning light turns on ..... 430

If a warning message is

displayed ............................ 440

If the battery is discharged ... 462

If the electronic key does not

operate properly ................. 459

If the engine will not start...... 457

If the vehicle is trapped in

rising water......................... 424

If you have a flat tire ............. 445

If you lose your keys..... 123, 124

If you think something is

wrong ................................. 428

If your vehicle becomes

stuck................................... 469

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency... 423

If your vehicle needs to be

towed.................................. 425

If your vehicle overheats....... 466

Engine

ACCESSORY mode ............. 185

Compartment........................ 383

Engine switch ....................... 184

Hood ..................................... 381

How to start the engine......... 184

Identification number ............ 474

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an

emergency ......................... 423

Ignition switch

(engine switch) ................... 184

Overheating .......................... 466

Alphabetical index

529

Engine coolant

Capacity................................ 476

Checking............................... 387

Preparing and checking

gauge........................................ 90

Engine coolant temperature

Engine immobilizer system ...... 77

Engine oil

Capacity................................ 475

Checking............................... 384

Preparing and checking

Engine switch .......................... 184

Enhanced VSC ......................... 309

Entune Audio Plus

Entune Premium Audio

EPS

(Electric Power Steering)...... 310

(EDR) ........................................ 11

Event data recorder

Flat tire ..................................... 445

Floor mats .................................. 26

Fluid

Automatic transaxle .............. 477

Brake .................................... 478

Washer ................................. 392

Front interior light ................... 333

Front passenger occupant

classification system.............. 50

Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light ........................ 433

Front personal lights............... 333

Front seat heaters ................... 329

Front seats ............................... 142

Adjustment............................ 142

Cleaning ............................... 369

Correct driving posture ........... 28

Driving position memory ....... 146

Head restraints ..................... 151

Power easy access

system................................ 146

Seat heaters ......................... 329

Seat ventilators..................... 329

Front side marker lights

: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

530

Alphabetical index

Front turn signal lights

Capacity................................ 474

Fuel

Fuel gauge.............................. 90

Fuel pump shut off system.... 429

Information............................ 481

Refueling............................... 214

Type.............................. 474, 481

Warning light......................... 433

Fuel consumption.................... 116

Fuel filler door.......................... 214

If the fuel filler door

cannot be opened............... 217

Refueling............................... 214

Fuel pump shut off system..... 429

Fuses ........................................ 416

Garage door opener ................ 357

Gauges ....................................... 90

Glove box ................................. 336

Grocery bag hooks.................. 341

Head restraints ........................ 151

Head-up display....................... 109

Headlights ................................ 202

Automatic High Beam........... 206

headlight illumination.......... 205

Windshield wiper linked

Heated steering wheel ............ 329

Heaters

Automatic air

conditioning system............ 322

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 324

Seat heaters ......................... 329

High mounted stoplight

Replacing.............................. 419

Hill-start assist control ........... 309

Hood ......................................... 381

Hooks

Coat hooks ........................... 356

Grocery bag hooks ............... 341

Retaining hooks (floor mat) .... 26

Horn .......................................... 154

HUD (Head-up display) ........... 109

Alphabetical index

531

I/M test ...................................... 378

ICS (Intelligent Clearance

Sonar)..................................... 284

Warning light......................... 433

Warning messages ............... 295

Identification

Engine................................... 474

Vehicle .................................. 473

Ignition switch

(engine switch) ...................... 184

Illuminated entry system ........ 334

Immobilizer system ................... 77

Indicators ................................... 87

Initialization

Intelligent Clearance

Sonar.................................. 295

Items to initialize ................... 505

Tire pressure

warning system .................. 395

Inside rear view mirror ............ 155

Instrument panel light

control ...................................... 91

Intelligent Clearance

Sonar (ICS)............................. 284

Warning light......................... 433

Warning messages ............... 295

Interior lights............................ 332

Switch ................................... 333

Intuitive parking assist............ 276

Jack

Positioning the jack............... 382

Vehicle-equipped jack .......... 446

Jack handle.............................. 446

Jam protection function

Moon roof ............................. 165

Power window ...................... 160

Keyless entry

Smart key system ......... 125, 131

Wireless remote

control ........................ 125, 131

Keys.......................................... 122

Battery-saving function ......... 137

Electronic key ....................... 122

Engine switch ....................... 184

If the electronic key does

not operate properly ........... 459

If you lose your keys..... 123, 124

Key number plate ................. 122

Keyless entry ........................ 122

Mechanical key..................... 122

Replacing the battery............ 414

Warning buzzer .................... 136

Wireless remote control........ 122

Knee airbags.............................. 36

532

Alphabetical index

Lane Departure Alert with

steering control (LDA) .......... 238

Language

(multi-information display)... 105

LATCH anchors ......................... 61

LDA (Lane Departure Alert

with steering control)............ 238

Lever

Auxiliary catch lever.............. 381

Hood lock release lever ........ 381

Internal trunk release lever ... 132

Shift lever.............................. 189

Tilt and telescopic steering

lock release lever ............... 153

Wiper lever............................ 210

License plate lights

Light switch ........................... 202

Replacing.............................. 419

Light bulbs

Lights

Automatic High Beam ........... 206

Cornering lights..................... 203

Daytime running light

system ................................ 204

Door courtesy lights .............. 332

Headlight switch.................... 202

Illuminated entry system ....... 334

Interior lights ......................... 333

Interior lights list.................... 332

Personal lights ...................... 333

Trunk light ............................. 132

Vanity lights .......................... 342

Welcome lighting .................. 205

Load capacity........................... 181

Lock steering column ............. 186

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance... 379

General maintenance ........... 374

Maintenance data ................. 472

Maintenance

requirements ...................... 372

Resetting the message indicating maintenance

is required .......................... 373

Malfunction indicator lamp..... 431

Master warning light ............... 433

Memory recall function ........... 149

Meter

Head-up display.................... 109

Indicators ................................ 87

Instrument panel light

control .................................. 91

Meters..................................... 90

Multi-information display......... 93

Settings................................. 100

Warning lights......................... 85

Warning messages............... 440

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror .......... 155

Outside rear view mirror

defoggers ........................... 324

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 157

Vanity mirrors ....................... 342

Moon roof................................. 164

Door lock linked moon roof

operation ............................ 165

Jam protection function ........ 165

Operation.............................. 164

Alphabetical index

533

Multi-information display.......... 93

Driving information.................. 97

Dynamic radar cruise control

Language.............................. 105

LDA (Lane Departure Alert

with steering control) .......... 243

Outside temperature ............... 90

PCS (Pre-Collision

System) .............................. 230

Settings................................. 100

Suggestion function .............. 106

Warning messages ............... 440

Navigation system

Noise from under vehicle............ 8

Odometer.................................... 90

Oil

Engine oil .............................. 475

Opener

Fuel filler door ....................... 216

Hood ..................................... 381

Trunk..................................... 131

Outside rear view mirrors ....... 157

Adjusting and folding ............ 157

Blind spot monitor (BSM)...... 261

Linked mirror function

when reversing ................... 158

Mirror position memory ......... 146

Outside rear view mirror

defoggers ........................... 324

Outside temperature

display...................................... 90

Overheating.............................. 466

Paddle shift switches.............. 191

Panic mode .............................. 123

Panoramic view monitor

Parking brake........................... 196

Parking brake engaged warning buzzer/

message............................. 199

Parking lights........................... 202

(Pre-Collision System).......... 226

PCS

Personal lights......................... 333

Power outlet............................. 343

Power steering

(Electric power steering

system) .................................. 310

Power windows ....................... 160

Door lock linked window

operation ............................ 162

Jam protection function ........ 160

Operation.............................. 160

Window lock switch .............. 160

Pre-Collision System

(PCS) ...................................... 226

range) ..................................... 248

: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

534

Alphabetical index

Radar cruise control

(dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed

Radiator .................................... 388

Rear Camera Detection

Function ................................. 272

Rear Cross Traffic Alert .......... 267

Rear Cross Traffic

Auto Brake ............................. 286

Rear passengers’ seat belt

reminder light ........................ 433

Rear personal lights ................ 333

Rear seat heaters..................... 329

Rear seats

Folding down ........................ 144

Rear side marker lights

Light switch ........................... 202

Rear turn signal lights

Inside rear view mirror .......... 155

Rear view mirror

Outside rear view mirrors...... 157

Rear window defogger ............ 324

Refueling .................................. 214

Capacity................................ 474

Fuel types ............................. 474

If the fuel filler door

cannot be opened............... 217

Opening the fuel tank cap..... 216

Replacing

Electronic key battery ........... 414

Fuses .................................... 416

Light bulbs ............................ 419

Tires...................................... 445

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners...................... 508

Resetting the message indicating maintenance

is required.............................. 373

Safety Connect .......................... 71

Seat belt reminder light .......... 433

Seat belts ................................... 30

Adjusting the seat belt ............ 31

Automatic Locking

Retractor .............................. 32

Child restraint system

installation ............................ 63

Cleaning and maintaining

the seat belt........................ 370

Emergency Locking

Retractor .............................. 32

How to wear your seat belt ..... 30

How your child should wear

the seat belt.......................... 32

Pregnant women, proper

seat belt use......................... 33

Reminder light and buzzer.... 433

Seat belt extender .................. 32

Seat belt instructions for

Canadian owners ............... 509

Seat belt pretensioners........... 31

SRS warning light ................. 431

Seat heaters ............................. 329

Seat ventilators........................ 329

Seating capacity ...................... 181

Alphabetical index

535

Seats ................................. 142, 144

Adjustment.................... 142, 144

Adjustment

precautions................. 143, 145

Child seats/child restraint

system installation ................ 63

Cleaning................................ 369

Driving position memory ....... 146

Folding down the rear

seatbacks ........................... 144

Front seat heaters................. 329

Head restraints ..................... 151

Power easy access

system ................................ 146

Properly sitting in the seat ...... 28

Rear seat heaters ................. 329

Seat ventilators ..................... 329

Secondary Collision Brake ..... 310

Sensor

Automatic headlight

system ................................ 204

Automatic High Beam

system ................................ 206

Camera sensor ..................... 220

Inside rear view mirror .......... 156

Intuitive parking assist .......... 276

LDA (Lane Departure Alert

with steering control) .......... 238

Radar sensor ........................ 220

Service reminder

indicators ................................. 84

Shift lever ................................. 189

Automatic transmission......... 189

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P ................ 193

S mode ................................. 190

Shift lock system..................... 192

Side airbags ............................... 37

Side marker lights ................... 202

Side mirrors ............................. 157

Adjusting and folding ............ 157

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ..... 261

Heaters ................................. 324

Side turn signal lights

Smart key system.................... 135

Antenna location................... 135

Entry functions.............. 125, 131

Starting the engine ............... 184

Snow tires ................................ 318

Spare tire.................................. 445

Inflation pressure .................. 478

Storage location.................... 446

Spark plug................................ 476

Specifications .......................... 472

Speedometer.............................. 90

Sport mode .............................. 305

Steering lock

Column lock release ............. 186

Steering wheel ......................... 153

Adjustment............................ 153

Heated steering wheel.......... 329

Meter control switches............ 94

Power easy access

system................................ 146

Stoplights

Storage feature ........................ 335

Storage precautions................ 335

536

Alphabetical index

Stuck

If the vehicle becomes

stuck ................................... 469

Sun visors ................................ 342

Sunshade

Roof ...................................... 165

Switches

Automatic High Beam

switch ................................. 206

Brake hold switch.................. 200

Cruise control switch............. 248

Door lock switches................ 127

Driving mode select

switches.............................. 305

Driving position memory

switches.............................. 146

Emergency flasher switch..... 422

Engine switch........................ 184

Fuel door opener switch ....... 216

Garage door opener

switches.............................. 357

Heated steering wheel .......... 329

Ignition switch ....................... 184

LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)

switch ................................. 242

Light switch ........................... 202

Meter control switches ............ 94

“MOOD” switch ..................... 334

Moon roof switches............... 164

“ODO/TRIP” switch ................. 95

Outside rear view mirror

switches.............................. 157

Paddle shift switches ............ 191

Parking brake switch............. 196

Power door lock switch ......... 127

Power window switches........ 160

Rear window and outside rear view mirror

defoggers switch ................ 324

Seat heater switches ............ 329

Seat ventilators switches ...... 329

“SOS” button........................... 71

Tilt and telescopic steering

lock release switch ............. 153

Trunk opener switch ............. 131

Vehicle-to-vehicle

distance switch................... 254

VSC OFF switch ................... 311

Window lock switch .............. 160

Windshield wiper and

washer switch..................... 210

Wireless charger switch........ 346

Tachometer ................................ 90

Tail lights

Alarm ...................................... 80

Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system..... 77

Tire inflation pressure............. 407

Maintenance data ................. 478

Warning light......................... 434

Tire information ....................... 484

Glossary ............................... 491

Size....................................... 487

Tire identification number ..... 486

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading .............................. 489

Tire pressure warning system

Initializing.............................. 395

Installing tire pressure warning valve and

transmitters ........................ 395

Registering ID codes ............ 396

Warning light......................... 434

Alphabetical index

537

Tires .......................................... 393

Chains................................... 317

Checking............................... 393

Glossary................................ 491

If you have a flat tire ............. 445

Inflation pressure .................. 478

Replacing.............................. 445

Rotating tires......................... 393

Size....................................... 478

Snow tires ............................. 318

Spare tire .............................. 445

Tire pressure warning

system ................................ 394

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading............................... 489

Warning light......................... 434

Tools ......................................... 446

Top tether strap ......................... 67

Total load capacity .................. 181

Towing

Dinghy towing ....................... 183

Emergency towing ................ 425

Trailer towing ........................ 182

Toyota Entune

Toyota parking assist monitor

Toyota Safety Sense P ............ 218

Automatic High Beam ........... 206

Dynamic radar cruise control

with steering control) .......... 238

LDA (Lane Departure Alert

PCS (Pre-Collision

System) .............................. 226

TRAC (Traction Control) ......... 309

Traction Control (TRAC) ......... 309

Trailer towing .......................... 182

Transmission

Automatic transmission ........ 189

Driving mode select

switches ............................. 305

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ..................... 193

Paddle shift switches ............ 191

S mode ................................. 190

Trip information....................... 116

Trip meters................................. 90

Trunk ........................................ 131

Cargo net.............................. 341

Grocery bag hooks ............... 341

Internal trunk release lever ... 132

Smart key system ................. 131

Trunk light............................. 132

Trunk opener ........................ 131

Wireless remote control........ 131

Trunk light

Trunk light............................. 132

bulbs................................... 419

Turn signal lights

Replacing light

USB charging port................... 344

: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

538

Alphabetical index

Vanity lights ............................. 342